BÀI TẬP LUYỆN CHUYÊN SÂU THEO TỪNG UNIT TIẾNG ANH 6,7 CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI TẬP 1 (ANSWER KEYS)

BÀI TẬP LUYỆN CHUYÊN SÂU TIẾNG ANH

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN TEST PREP PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

BÀI TẬP LUYỆN CHUYÊN SÂU THEO TỪNG UNIT TIẾNG ANH 6,7 CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI TẬP 1 (ANSWER KEYS) WORD VERSION | 2021 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM

Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

BÀI TẬP CHUYÊN SÂU TIẾNG ANH 6 TẬP 1

1

ENGLISH 6 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. cover B. go C. flow D. so 2. A. flow B. love C. stone D. November B. sun C. glue D. shut 3. A. summer 4. A. slowly B. foam C. cover D. home B. shoot C. shut D. flood 5. A. blood 6. A. money B. sorry C. morning D. story 7. A. now B. grow C. down D. town 8. A. study B. student C. studio D. stupid B. about C. hour D. country 9. A. house 10. A. lunch B. fun C. judo D. sun 11. A. uniform B. computer C. student D. judo 12. A. subject B. sure C. surround D. see 13. A. excited B. nice C. library D. living 14. A. school B. teacher C. cheap D. watching 15. A. teach B. speak C. break D. read 16. A. flat B. hat C. many D. gas 17. A. missed B. called C. explained D. planned 18. A. choir B. chocolate C. chore D. chin 19. A. sorry B. physics C. size D. singer 20. A. fun B. student C. hungry D. sun 21. A. subject B. club C. put D. lunch 22. A. but B. lunch C. student D. up 23. A. day B. lake C. tall D. plane 24. A. restaurant B. river C. well D. left 25. A. office B. behind C. clinic D. picture 26. A. activity B. compass C. thank D. have 27. A. come B. someone C. brother D. volleyball 28. A. lunch B. computer C. calculator D. uniform 29. A. picture B. minute C. bicycle D. listen 30. A. repeat B. wearing C. teacher D. meat 31. A. come B. month C. mother D. open 32. A. brother B. judo C. going D. rode 33. A. come B. poem C. going D. follow

2

B. Monday B. mother B. teaching B. ago B. someone B. computer B. lunch B. among B. compass B. should B. nothing B. luck B. judo B. snow B. love B. creative B. counting

34. A. other 35. A. judo 36. A. school 37. A. wonderful 38. A. come 39. A. lunch 40. A. funny 41. A. other 42. A. activity 43. A. group 44. A. window 45. A. true 46. A. homework 47. A. show 48. A. notebook 49. A. activity 50. A. surround

C. brother C. open C. chess C. show C. brother C. calculator C. sun C. potato C. thank C. soup C. bowl C. Sunday C. compass C. bowl C. above C. continuous C. country

D. closer D. postcard D. chalk D. go D. volleyball D. uniform D. computer D. nothing D. have D. pour D. grow D. uncle D. overseas D. now D. Monday D. international D. about

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. greenhouse B. compass C. surround D. classmate 2. A. boarding B. judo C. pocket D. replace 3. A. delay B. swimming C. money D. compass 4. A. creative B. interview C. equipment D. remember 5. A. overseas B. beautiful C. difficult D. miracle 6. A. behind B. cupboard C. kitchen D. boring 7. A. backpack B. quiet C. feather D. pollute 8. A. rubbish B. dislike C. money D. lucky 9. A. bathroom B. messy C. backyard D. modern 10. A. cuisine B. valley C. pollute D. dislike 11. A. 12. A.

ready forgot 13. A. uniform

B. about C. heavy D. borrow B. early C. physics D. lesson B. exercise C. bicycle D. excited

14. A . canteen

B. healthy

C. rubber

D. textbook

15. A. evening

B. badminton

C. already

D. favourite

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. I sometimes ________ to the cinema.

3

A. go B. goes C. going D. to go 2. John ________much better now.

A. feel B. feels C. feeling D. is feeling 3. I ________football every weekend.

A. study B. have C. play D. do 4. She ________English at the moment.

A. study B. is studying C. studies D. studying 5. She is ________hard for her A levels.

A. having B. playing C. studying D. doing 6. I always ________a cooked breakfast.

A. have B. do C. play D. study 7. She ________to be an architect.

A. study B. studies C. studying D. is studying 8. I ________a one-hour lunch break.

A. play B. have C. do D. study 9. I’m ________physics, biology and chemistry.

A. playing B. having C. doing D. going 10. Do you want to ________cards with me?

A. play B. come C. have D. learn 11. Listening to music is one of the most popular leisure ________.

A. kindergarten B. activities C. hobby D. equipments 12. My son is just 2 years old and he is in _______ now.

A. kindergarten B. overseas C. high school D. secondary school 13. I don't like to ________ money from friends.

A. pay B. knock C. borrow D. help 14. We only have time for a snack at ________.

A. lunch B. gym C. meals D. break time 15. Do you know where our new ________ is? Our teacher wants to meet him.

A. poem B. classmate C. swimming pool D. gym 16. In order to keep ________, you should eat well and exercise regularly.

A. warm B. excited C. healthy D. quiet 17. My sister always has a lot of new ideas. She's a ________ person.

A. creative B. hard-working C. quiet D. healthy 18. Don't go climbing without the necessary ________.

A. uniform B. pocket money C. equipment D. share 4

19. Today is my son's first day at school so he is very ________.

A. creative B. excited C. worry D. interesting 20. It's impolite to go into someone's room without ________.

A. riding B. playing C. knocking D. sharing 21. Peter _______ an accident yesterday when he crossed the street.

A. studied B. had C. played D. did 22. James is _______ judo in the playground with his friends.

A. studying B. doing C. playing D. have 23. Linh _______ a headache so she is sleeping in her bedroom.

A. does B. plays C. studying D. has 24. My dad is _______ a cup of coffee with his colleague in the living room now.

A. plays B. study C. doing D. having 25. Williams always _______ breakfast with bread, egg and milk before coming to school.

A. has B. plays C. studies D. does 26. Nick and Rosy usually help their mom _______ the chores at the weekend.

A. study B. do C. playing D. have 27. He often _______ English vocabulary every morning.

A. doing B. having C. studies D. plays 28. Phong _______ basketball with his younger brother three times a week.

A. does B. has C. plays D. study 29. Emily sometimes _______ a chat with her pen friend in England.

A. does B. has C. studies D. plays 30. Jane is _______ History at the moment to prepare for the final exam.

A. studying B. doing C. playing D. has 31. You must _______ her report carefully before making a decision.

A. do B. study C. play D. have 32. I can sing but I can't _______ the flute.

A. play B. do C. study D. have 33. How is your first week _________ school?

A. on B. at C. for D. to 34. My brother often helps me_________ my homework.

A. at B. about C. for D. with 35. Megan is_________ badminton with her friends in the schoolyard.

A. having B. studying C. playing D. doing 36. The villa is_________ by pine trees.

5

A. surrounded B. built C. covered D. grounded 37. We do_________ in the gym every afternoon.

A. table tennis B. football C. judo D. homework 38. _________ does Jane have science? ~ On Monday and Friday.

A. Where B. What C. When D. What time 39. Nowadays, students often use_________ in mathematics lessons.

A. rubbers B. calculators C. pencils D. dictionaries 40. My cousin goes to a_________ school, so she only comes home at weekends.

A. boarding B. private C. public D. international 41. You look really_________ in your new uniform!

A. excited B. smart C. healthy D. interesting 42. _________ your parents give you pocket money?

A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does 43. In many schools in Vietnam students have to wear a________.

A. clothing B. suit C. uniform D. coat 44. Trung: "Why do you think most people learn English?”

Phong: “________” A. All of them are B. I hear it is very good C. Because it's useful to them D. Because I like it 45. When my friend misses the lessons, I always________ him my notes.

A. takes B. send C. borrow D. lend 46. That is the laboratory________ we do all our experiments.

A. which B. where C. when D. that 47. - “How’s your class this year?”

- “Great.________ forty-seven students, and they are good friends.”

A. It's B. They're C. There's D. There're 48. It is necessary for students to listen to their teacher________.

A. attentive B. attentively C. attention D. attending 49. Children will work hard if the lessons are________.

A. nice B. pleasant C. disappointing D. interesting 50. I'm always nervous when I'm________ an exam.

A. taking B. making C. working D. writing C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

6

1. He is certainly the finest ……………………………..in Hollywood today.

2. He is a serious ……………………….., and totally committed to his work.

3. She’s very …………………………….. on the design front.

4. No special …………………………….. is needed.

5. I still find the job ……………………………..

6. They are afraid of losing their …………………………….. identity.

7. …………………………….. rarely ask about his personal life.

8. He’s the …………………………….. of a successful cartoon series.

9. There is increased volcanic …………………………….. in the region.

10. She’s the highest-paid …………………………….. in Hollywood.

11. History is an ……………. subject.

12. They have ……………. in finding a suitable apartment.

13. The company has only 60 …………….

14. The ……………. way to travel is by plane.

15. Her English is ……………. than mine.

16. What a ……………. party! I’d like go to home.

17. Few students like him. He is an ……………. teacher.

18. Some people play sport to be ________, not because they like it.

19. My aunt works as a ________ at a university.

20. Students of our school are ________ with one another.

21. The ________ of the experiment is 20 minutes.

22. Be ________! The ground is very wet and slippery.

23. When foreigners talk to him, he can speak English ________ with them.

24. I like the fried chicken in our school canteen: it's really ________.

25. Sometimes we are bored and ________ with his long lectures.

(ACT) (ART) (CREATE) (EQUIP) (EXCITE) (NATION) (INTERVIEW) (CREATE) (ACT) (ACT) (INTEREST) (DIFFICULT) (EMPLOY) (FAST) (GOOD) (BORE) (POPULAR) (HEALTH) (CHEMISTRY) (FRIEND) (LONG) (CARE) (EASY) (TASTE) (SLEEP)

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

Dear Lena, How are you? I want to tell you about our school tradition. Birthday is a (1.WONDER) holiday for everybody, isn’t it? Every month, we celebrate birthdays of our ________ classmates. We organize birthday parties for them. First, we decorate our classroom. Then we think of the sincere (2. CONGRATULATE)_________ for our classmates. I want to tell you about the last (3. CELEBRATE) _____________. That time we organized funny (4.COMPLETE) _________. We recited poems and sang songs. We baked a big and (5.

7

TASTE) _________ cake. All were happy. I liked disco most of all. Tell me more about your school traditions.

Good bye! I’m looking forward to (6. HEAR) ___________ from you soon.

Yours truly, Alex D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form 1. She (walk)___________ to school every morning.

2. They (learn) ___________________ how to use the lawnmower in the garden.

3. Linda (go) ______________to the supermarket to buy some sugar.

4. Sometimes I (feel) _________________________ really lazy to do anything.

5. Phong and I (study) _________________________ English in my room.

6. I often (have) ____________________ breakfast at 7 A. m at home.

7. She (do)_________________ aerobics every morning to keep fit.

8. Nga (like) __________________playing basketball very much.

9. What time you (have) _____________________lunch every day?

10. She (not have) __________________ any pen, so I lend her one.

II. Fill in the blank with correct forms of a suitable verbs (study, have, do, play) to complete the following sentences.

1. He is _________________ hard at the moment 2. They _____________________ a beautiful home.

3. You can take the documents home and ____________________ them at your leisure.

4. He ______________ plenty of money but no style.

5. Jane ________________ the guitar and her brother is on percussion.

6. Nga is _________________ to be an architect.

7. Can I ________________ a drink of water?

8. Diane is _________________ anthropology at university.

9. I can’t go out tonight – I’ve got to ________________ my history paper.

10. Which team do you _____________ for?

III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form 1. The plane (fly) _____________ to London every Monday.

2. Marc (make) _______________ pizza now.

3. Rose (read) _______________ a book.

4. First I (get) ______________ up, then I (have) _________________ breakfast.

5. Why it always (rain_______________ in Germany?

6. She (understand) ______________ English.

7. My friend often (draw) ______________ nice posters.

8

8. Why you always (criticize) _______________ me?

9. You can go outside now. It (not rain) ________________ any more.

10. The sun (rise) _______________in the east.

IV. Put the verbs into the correct form. Use Present Simple.

1. They ______________ (play) football and basketball at school.

2. My father ______________ (read) the newspaper every morning.

3. We ______________ (have) English, Maths and Science on Monday.

4. She never ______________ (do) her homework.

5. I ______________ (go) swimming twice a week.

6. Cars ______________ (be) more expensive than motorbikes.

7. Jane always ______________ (have) breakfast at 6 o’clock.

8 He usually ______________ (watch) TV after dinner.

9. London ______________ (be) a very big country.

10. I ______________ (be) a student and my parents ______________ (be) teachers.

E. CORRECTION I. Find a mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence.

1. What time does Mai has English class?

A B C D 2. Do you often go at school library when you have free time?

A BC D 3. She cleans the floor every morning. She cleans it now.

A B C D 4. When time do you usually get up every day?

A B C D 5. Does your mother and Mrs. Lanh work here? Yes, they do.

A B C D 6. How many child does she have? Two sons and two daughters.

A B C D 7. John are cleaning the room at the moment A B C D 8. I swim usually at the weekend A B C D 9. I and Lan rides a bike to school everyday A B C D 10. My mom don’t usually go to work on Saturday A B C D 9

11. My father works at the moment.

A B C D 12. I am often playing football on Saturdays.

A B C D 13. She is wanting to buy a new computer.

A B C D 14. My children doesn’t like reading.

A B C D 15. We have breakfast now.

A B C D 16. The girls are skip on the playground.

A B C D 17. Ann gets up at 6 o’clock and is having breakfast every day.

A B C D 18. I’m sorry I don’t have time. I cook dinner.

A B C D 19. I can see that there is a vase behind of the light.

A B C D 20. We don’t stay up late in night.

A B C D II. Read the text and find 10 mistakes then correct them.

Example: live→ lives Miss Lien live in a small house on Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually is breakfast in seven in the morning and she has dinner at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches his students in the morning. She teaches them dialogues on Wednesdays to Fridays. On Mondays, she teach them grammar. On the evening, she usually stays at home and listens books. She sometimes goes to the movie theatre. She always go to bed at ten o’clock.

ANSWERS 1. .................. 2. .................. 3. ................... 4. .................. 5. ...................

6. .................. 7. .................. 8. ................... 9. .................. 10...................

F. READING I. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered blank.

Our teacher always motivates us to take (1) _______ in the sports activity, quiz competitions, oral and written activities, debates, scouting, group discussion and (2) _______activities in the school. Our class teacher teaches us (3) _______discipline of the school and keeps the school compound clean (4) _______tidy. Our principal (5) _______us motivational messages daily on the stage of prayer. We learn (6) _______ honest, truthful, 10

obedient and sincere in our whole life. We learn_______ how to concentrate (7) _______the study in the class room. Our school organizes a quiz competition, dance competition and sports competition annually which is compulsory for (8) _______to participate.

1. A. piece B. part C. sort D. type 2. A. same B. similar C. another D. other 3. A. to maintain B. maintain C. maintains D. maintaining 4. A. what B. if C. and D. or 5. A. tell B. tells C. told D. telling B. being C. to be D. been 6. A. be B. at C. in D. to 7. A. on 8. A. we B. our C. ours D. us

II. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blanks. all actual your idea for forward and score On the first day of school, the secret to success is in the planning, not the pedagogy.

How’s (1) __________ back-to-school planning going? Have you forgotten anything? Our checklist can help! Included: Online resources (2) __________ a variety of back-to-school planning needs, including welcome letters, bulletin board ideas, (3) __________ back-toschool activities.

It’s official. You’re a teacher! You aced (4) __________ your education courses, know the subject matter backward and (5) __________, can rattle off the names and philosophies of dozens of educational theorists, and achieved a pretty respectable (6) __________ on the state certification exam. You finally have an (7) __________ job and an official class list.

There’s only one problem. The first day of school is drawing near and you have no (8) __________ want to do. Are you really ready to face that first terrifying day?

III. Read the following text and answer the questions below One of the reasons you may have identified for underperforming is that you’re not taking good enough notes. Hurriedly scrawled notes from class can be difficult to make sense of when you come to revise from them, or even to write an essay based on them. It’s all to easy to misunderstand your own notes and fail to get a strong enough grasp of the topic. It’s imperative, therefore, that you produce good notes from each of your classes and from the books you use – notes that you can read, that are useful, and that are logically organized. If you make notes by hand- in class, for example – try to type them up at the end of the day, while they’re still fresh in your mind.

1. What is the one of the reasons for underperforming?

11

……………………………………….……………………………………….……………………………………….………………………

2. What are problems of Hurriedly scrawled notes? ……………………………………….……………………………………….……………………………………….………………………

3. What is the problem when misunderstanding your own notes? ……………………………………….……………………………………….……………………………………….………………………

4. Why are good notes from each of your classes and from the books important? ……………………………………….……………………………………….……………………………………….………………………

5. What should be done after making notes by hand? ……………………………………….……………………………………….……………………………………….………………………

IV. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

Chu Van An High School, also known as Chu Van An National School or Pomelo School, is one of the three provincial public magnet high schools in Hanoi, Vietnam, along with Hanoi-Amsterdam High School and Nguyen Hue High School. Established by French authorities in 1908 as High School of Protectorate, this is one of the oldest institutions for secondary education in Indochina. Despite the initial purpose of the French government for this school which was training native civil servant to serve in their colonial establishments, Vietnamese students at Buoi school, common name of the school, had many times struggled against colonial doctrine and the ruling power. With that patriotic and hard-working traditions, a lot of Buoi alumni became important figures in many area of Vietnam society such as the revolutionary Pham Van Dong, doctor Ton That Tung or poet Xuan Dieu 1. Who established Chu Van An High School? ……………………..…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2. When was Chu Van An High School established? ……………………..…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

3. What is the initial purpose of the French government for this school? ……………………..…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4. What was the common name of Chu Van An High School? ……………………..…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5. Say the names of some important Buoi alumni. ……………………..…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

V. Read the following text and use the given words to fill in the blanks by – are – and – And - within – local – secondary - is Education in Canada is for the most part provided publicly, funded (1) ……………………. overseen by federal, provincial, and (2) ……………………. government. Education (3) ……………………. within provincial jurisdiction and the curriculum is overseen (4) …………………….

12

the province. Education in Canada is generally divided (5) ……………………. primary education, followed by (6) ……………………. education and post-secondary. (7) ……………………. the provinces under the ministry of education, there (8) ……………………. district school boards administering the educational programs.

G. WRITING I. Finish each of the following sentences so that its meaning stays the same.

1. My brother often drives to work. → My brother often goes_________________________________________________ 2. My sister goes to the market every day on foot. → My sister ___________________________________________________________ 3. How much is this car? → How much does______________________________________________________ 4. Why don’t we go out for a while? → What about__________________________________________________________ 5. No church in the village is older than this one. → This is______________________________________________________________ 6. Are there seven hundred pupils in your school? → Does your school_____________________________________________________ 7. What’s your weight? → How_______________________________________________________________ 8. Mr. Quang is Vy’s father. → Mr. Quang has _______________________________________________________ 9. They like pizza very much. → Their favorite________________________________________________________ 10. The bookstore is to the left of the hospital. → The hospital_________________________________________________________ II. Use the given words to write the complete sentences.

1. school year/ Vietnam/ begin/ September. → .................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2. elementary/ school day/ last/ 7:30 A. m/ 1:00 p.m. → .................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3. children/ often/ wear/ uniform/ sit/ bench/ behind/ wooden desk/ small porcelain inkpot/ corner. → .................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4. schoolgirl/ often wear/ white dress/ boy/ wear/ white shirt/ read kerchief. → .................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5. window/ rural school/ often/ have no panel. → .................................................................................................................................................................................................................

III. Rearrange the given words or phrases to make meaningful sentences.

1. the same/ the world/ Mathematics/ everywhere else/ as/ in/ is.

13

……………………………………………………………………………………………

2. favorite subjects/ Literature/ secondary school/ one of/ is/ in/ my. ……………………………………………………………………………………………

3. an overview/ the continents/ Geography/ about/ gives/ knowledge ……………………………………………………………………………………………

4. a 45 minute test/ a 15 minute test/ a month/ There is/ twice/ and/ every week. ……………………………………………………………………………………………

5. main exams/ every grade/ There are/ during/ four. ……………………………………………………………………………………………

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) about your first school day of this school year. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ =================================================== ANSWER KEYS UNIT 1. MY NEW SCHOOL A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A 11. D 21. C 31. D 41. C 2. B 12. B 22. C 32. A 42. B 3. C 13. D 23. C 33. A 43. D 4. C 14. A 24. B 34. D 44. B 5. B 15. C 25. B 35. B 45. A 6. A 16. C 26. B 36. A 46. C 7. B 17. A 27. D 37. A 47. D 8. A 18. A 28. B 38. D 48. A 9. D 19. B 29. C 39. A 49. D 10. C 20. B 30. B 40. D 50. C II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.C 4.B 7.D 10.B 13.D 2.D 5.A 8.B 11.B 14.A 3.A 6.A 9.C 12.A 15.C

14

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.A 11.B 21.B 31.A 41.B 2.B 12.A 22.B 32.A 42.C 3.C 13.C 23.D 33. B 43.C 4.B 14.D 24.D 34.D 44.C 5.C 15.B 25.A 35.C 45.D 6.A 16.C 26.B 36.A 46.B 7.D 17.A 27.C 37.C 47.D 8.B 18.C 28C 38.C 48.B 9.B 19.B 29.B 39.B 49.D 10.A 20.C 30.A 40.A 50.A

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. actors 6. national 11. interesting 16. boring 21. length 2. artist 7. interviewers 12. difficulty 17. unpopular 22. careful 3. creative 8. creator 13. employees 18. healthy 23. easily 4. equipment 9. activity 14. fastest 19. chemist 24. tasty 5. exciting 10. actress 15. better 20. friendly 25. sleepy II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

1. wonderful 2. congratulations 3. celebration 4. competitions 5. tasty 6. hearing D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form 1. walks 2. are learning 3. is going 4. feel 6. have 7. does 8. like 9. do you have

5. are studying 10. doesn’t have II. Fill in the blank with correct forms of a suitable verb (study, have, do, play) to complete the following sentences.

1. studying 2. have 3. study 4. has 5. plays

15

6. studying 7. have 8. doing 9. do III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.

1. flies 2. is making 3. is reading 4. get – have 6. understands

7. draws

8. are you 9. isn’t raining always criticizing IV. Put the verbs into the correct form. Use Present Simple.

1. play 2. reads 3. have 4. does 6. are 7. has 8. watches 9. is E. CORRECTION I. Find a mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence.

1.C 6.A 11.B 2.C 7.A 12.A 3.C 8.B 13.A 4.A 5.A

9.A 10.B

14.C 15.B

II. Read the text and find 10 mistakes then correct them.

1. on → in 2. is → has 3. in (seven) → at 4. in → at 6. on → from 7. teach → 8.On the 9.listens → teaches evening→ In the reads evening

10. play 5. is it always raining 10. rises

5. go 10. am - are

16.B 17.C 18.C 19.D 20.D

5. his → her 10. go → goes

F. READING I. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered blank.

1. B 2.D 3.A 4.C 5. B 6.C 7.A 8.D II. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

1. your 2. for 3. and 4. all 5. forward 6. score 7. actual 8. idea III. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

1. It is that you’re not taking good enough notes.

2. It can be difficult to make sense of them when revising or writing an essay based on them.

3. You may fail to get a strong enough grasp of the topic.

4. Good notes can be read, useful and logically organized.

5. You should try to type them up at the end of the day, while they’re still fresh in your mind.

IV. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

1. French authorities established Chu Van An High School.

16

2. It was established in 1908.

3. It was for training native civil servant to serve in their colonial establishments.

4. It was Buoi School.

5. They were Pham Van Dong, doctor Ton That Tung or poet Xuan Dieu.

V. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blanks.

1. and 2. local 3. is 4. by 5. into 6. secondary 7. within 8. are G. WRITING I. Finish each of the following sentences so that its meaning stays the same.

1. My brother often goes to work by car.

2. My sister walks to the market every day.

3. How much does this car cost?

4. What about going out for a while?

5. This is the oldest church in the village.

6. Does your school have seven hundred pupils?

7. How heavy are you?

8. Mr. Quang has a daughter, Vy. 9. Their favourite food is pizza.

10. The hospital is to the right of the bookstore.

II. Use the given words to write the complete sentences.

1. The school year in Vietnam begins in September.

2. The elementary school day lasts from 7:30an to 1:00pm.

3. Children often wear uniforms and sit on benches behind wooden desks with small porcelain inkpots in the corners.

4. Schoolgirls often wear white dresses and boys wear white shirts and red kerchiefs.

5. The windows in rural schools often have no panes.

III. Rearrange the given words or phrases to make meaningful sentences.

1. Mathematics is the same as everywhere else in the world.

2. Literature is one of my favorite subjects in secondary school.

3. Geography gives an over view knowledge about the continents.

4. There is a 15 minute test every week and a 45 minute test twice a month.

5. There are four main exams during every grade.

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) about your first school day of this school year. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 17

_______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ =================================================== UNIT 2: MY HOME A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. slang B. sugar C. size D. song 2. A. glasses B. watches C. drives D. chooses 3. A. books B. plans C. tables D. chairs B. chooses C. magazines D. houses 4. A. loses 5. A. groups B. fans C. bottles D. flowers 6. A. schools B. shops C. pets D. carts 7. A. pens B. closets C. sweets D. lamps 8. A. rulers B. pencils C. bags D. books 9. A. matches B. makes C. brushes D. peaches 10. A. bees B. cupboards C. watches D. bedrooms 11. A. feast B. seat C. bread D. heat 12. A. peanut B. cut C. shut D. put 13. A. what B. flat C. sand D. Saturday 14. A. hike B. beside C. hide D. picnic 15. A. washed B. sacred C. booked D. hoped 16. A. forms B. chairs C. seats D. keys 17. A. papers B. bosses C. brushes D. foxes 18. A. cats B. dogs C. phones D. drawers B. plants C. tables D. computers 19. A. pigs 20. A. beaches B. watches C. sinks D. lunches 21. A. boys B. lessons C. cats D. pictures 22. A. places B. messages C. houses D. clothes 23. A. sinks B. bags C. laptops D. students 24. A. fridges B. kisses C. watches D. wardrobes 25. A. plates B. posters C. trees D. songs 26. A. light B. fridge C. sink D. kitchen 27. A. lamps B. windows C. desks D. plants 28. A. look B. cook C. book D. room 29. A. poster B. chopstick C. sofa D. wardrobe 30. A. honey B. house C. hour D. hotel 31. A. chairs B. sofas C. rooms D. sinks 18

32. A. lamps 33. A. vases 34. A. houses 35. A. bag 36. A. both 37. A. child 38. A. teacher 39. A. homeland 40. A. cheeks 41. A. mothers 42. A. cities 43. A. grandparents 44. A. fridge 45. A. television 46. A. lives 47. A. dances 48. A. cooks 49. A. walks 50. A. wishes

B. halls B. fridges B. pictures B. family B. honey B. sunshine B. chalk B. household B. hands B. centers B. watches B. brothers B. light B. toilet B. works B. makes B. tells B. kisses B. passes

C. desks C. dishes C. wardrobes C. bath C. telephone C. dine C. match C. hourly C. elbows C. aunts C. dishes C. uncles C. picture C. bed C. plays C. asks C. reads C. dances C. kisses

D. lights D. tables D. bookshelves D.fan D. nobody D. dinner D. chemistry D. however D. fingers D. cousins D. houses D. fathers D. living D. basket D. studies D. stops D. goes D. boxes D. makes

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. diverse B. mountain C. rooster D. crowded B. Korean C. under D. funny 2. A. railway 3. A. money B. cupboard C. firework D. remote 4. A. remember B. condition C. dishwasher D. department 5. A. appearance B. family C. windsurfing D. serious 6. A. boarding B. sofa C. patient D. between 7. A. empty B. desert C. prepare D. quiet 8. A active B. remote C. wonder D. thrilling 9. A. sporty B. surround C. pollute D. between 10. A. firefighter B. furniture C. essential D. decorate 11. A.

behind B. happy A. grandparents B. computer 13. A. fireplace B. laptop 14. A. interesting B. apartment 15. A. cupboard B. messy 12.

C. sofa C. microwave C. tourist C. dishwasher C. device

D. dinner D. beautiful D. hotel D. family D. bedroom

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. What’s the date today ? - It is ____ June.

19

A. twelve B. twelfth C. twelve of D. the twelfth of 2. How many windows are there in your house? - ____ six.

A. There is B. There are C. There has D. There have 3. ____is Phong ? - He’s in the living room.

A. When B. Where C. Who D. What 4. Which verb adds _____es in the third person?

A. go B. write C. sleep D. tell 5. _____a clock in your room?

A. Are there B. Is there C. Have there D. Has there 6. There are a lot of things _____in Da Lat .

A. see B. to see C. seeing D. to seeing 7. It is called the Tiger room_____there is a big tiger on the wall.

A. because B. so C. but D. like 8. I live______my parents and my younger sister in a town house _____ Ha Noi. A. with - at B. at - at C. of - in D. with - in 9. We are moving______a new house _____ the city centre soon.

A. to - in B. at - at C. to - from D. from - in 10. We live in a town house, but our grandparents live in a______house.

A. villa B. country C. apartment D. city 11. There are two lights____the ceiling.

A. at B. in C. on D. between 12. There is a family photo _____the wall.

A. on B. at C. in D. next 13. There______four chairs and a table _____ the middle of the room.

A. is - on B. is - in C. are - at D. are - in 14. We need some chairs ______the kitchen.

A. with B. for C. at D. on 15. There are some dirty dishes _____the floor.

A. in B. with C. on D. for 16. There is an electric ________, a stove and a fridge in our kitchen.

A. cooking B. cooker C. cook D. cooked 17. They are having lunch in their beautiful big ______room.

A. dined B. dinner C. dine D. dining 18. He should clean his _______room. There are a lot of toys and clothes on the floor.

A. messy B. mess C. messing D. messed 19. They look around their new apartment with lots of________modern devices.

A. interest B. interested C. interestingly D. interesting 20. Your cupboard is too old. Let's_____a new one.

A. buy B. bought C. buying D. to buy 21. My father is watching TV in the_____while my mother is cooking inthe_____.

A. living room/ bedroom B. bedroom/ bathroom C. living room/ kitchen D. kitchen/ hall 20

22. His uncle climbs the ladder and puts old things in the_____.

A. attic B. toilet C.hall D. bathroom 23. Many people live in_____in mountainous areas to avoid dangerous animals.

A. town houses B. villas C.stilt houses D. apartments 24. It's so hot in my living room because the_______was broken.

A. fridge B. air-conditioner C. dishwasher D. cooker 25. You should tidy up your clothes in the_____. They seem so messy.

A. sofa B. cupboard C.sink D. wardrobe 26. Don’t stand ________ the TV I’m trying to watch this programme.

A. behind B. next to C. under D. in front of 27. You should never stand ________ a tree when it is raining, A. at B. under C. between D. on 28. My mother is in the ________ baking a cake for my birthday.

A. bathroom B. dinning room C. kitchen D. bedroom 29. Please turn the ________ on. It’s so hot in here.

A.fan B. light C. television D. faucet 30. The Tay and Nung people mostly live in ________ made of wood and bamboo.

A. apartments B. stilt houses C. town houses D. villas 31. In our dining room, ________ four chairs and a table. We have breakfast there every morning.

A. there is B. there are C. there isn’t D. there aren’t 32.________ any children in the playground right now.

A. There is B. There are C. There aren’t D. There isn’t 33. I like my bedroom best. It’s my ________ room.

A. beautiful B. comfortable C. wonderful D. favourite 34. My room is so ________! Dirty clothes, toys, books are all over the floor!

A. messy B. crazy C. tidy D. cozy 35. ‘Where do you live?’‘________’ A. On the floor.

B. In the kitchen.

C. In a town house.

D. Next to the bookshelf.

36. Turn on the _________, please. It’s so hot here.

A. cupboard B. dishwasher C. air conditioner D. lamp 37. I _________ an _________with three friends.

A. share – apartment B. move – attic C. share – furniture D. move – country house 38. I put my clothes in the _________ at the corner of my bedroom.

A. wall B.hall C. kitchen D. chest of drawers 39. You must be _________ to lend him your motorbike. He’s very careless.

A. crazy B. attic C. interesting D. briefly 40. Where should we go to buy some clothes, fruits and food? – In _________.

A. a hall B. a living room 21

C. a department store D. a stilt house 41. Don’t run the _________ half empty. It wastes energy.

A. dishwasher B. kitchen C. wardrobe D. sink 42. She ran excitedly down the _________ to greet her cousins.

A. furniture B. hall C. messy D. armchair 43. Would you mind helping me hang this dress in the _________?

A. sofa B. sink C. wardrobe D. vase 44. A _________ is a piece of electrical equipment to store food and keep food cold or fresh.

A. fridge B. dishwasher C. microwave D. cooker 45. He asked the children to go to the _________ and wash their hands.

A. upstairs B. attic C. bathroom D. apartment 46. Put these glasses and bowls on the _________ over there, please.

A. wall B. cupboard C. fridge D. lamp 47. My bedroom is big but it doesn’t have much _________. There is just a bed, a table, a chair and a bookcase.

A. things B. picture C. desk D. furniture 48. It’s becoming hotter so I’m going to install a(n) _________ in my bedroom.

A. fridge B. air conditioner C. television D. lamp 49. It’s better for your neck when you sleep with a _________ that is not too high or too low.

A. pillow B.bed C. ceiling fan D. stool 50. I often reheat my soup in the _________ before eating.

A. cupboard B. microwave C. dishwasher D. sink C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. I keep my socks in the bottom_______________.

(DRAW)

2. I don’t attach any ___________to these rumours.

(IMPORTANT)

3. Payment is _________________upon delivery of the goods.

(CONDITION)

4. This story is apparently a complete ________________.

(INVENT)

5. What a ____________ thing to say!

(BEAUTY)

6. There’s no ___________________ in the results.

(DIFFERENT)

7. Do you get many_________________?

(VISIT)

8. Do you have any ideas? You’re the _______________one.

(CREATE)

9. The road gradually _____________out.

(WIDE)

22

10. This room is twice the _______________ of the kitchen.

(LONG)

11. There are four__________ in my house.

(BOOKSHELF)

12. My mother goes ___________ twice a week.

(SHOP)

13. There is a .......................rice paddy near my house

(BEAUTY)

14. To the right of my house there is a ________ garden.

(BEAUTY)

15. I’d like some bread. Let’s go to the _______

(BAKE )

16. He greets me in a ________ way.

(FRIEND)

17. What’s Maco’s ._________? - She’s British.

(NATION)

18.Yoko is from Japan. She is ________

(Japan)

(JAPAN)

19.These children like ____________ weather.

(SUN)

20. Lan’s classroom is on the ________floor.

(TWO)

D. VERB FORMS I. Fill in the blanks with is, are, isn't, aren't, do, does.

1. We staying at my cousin’s house in Vung Tau. they have the right things for the kitchen?

2.

3. Where you live, Phong?

4. Where ____ your uncle live?

5. How many rooms there in the hotel?

6. There any chairs in the kitchen. We need five chairs.

7. Which house you want to live in? A town house or a country house?

8. There any furniture in my bedroom. I need many things.

9. In my house, there four bedrooms.

10.What Mrs. Brown need for the living room?

II. Give the correct form of the words in the blank (Using the present simple and present continuous).

1. Lan (not have) ______ many friends in her new school.

2. Hung (come) ______ from Ha Noi but he (stay) ______ with his relatives in Ho Chi Minh city at the moment.

3. We (not drive) ______ to work every day. We (go) ______ by bus.

4. Who you (talk) _______ to on the phone now, Minh?

5. Where your new friend (live) _________ Nga? -She (live) ________ on Hang Bai street.

6. you (be) ________ in class 7A? -No, I (be)________ in class 7D. 7. Look! Jane (play)_______ the guitar. This afternoon, she will play table tennis.

23

8. I (not talk) __________ to her at present 9. How often ________ she (go) ________ fishing?

- She (go) _________ once a year.

10.(Be) _______your friends students?

-Yes, they (be) _________

III. Complete the sentences with the -ing form of the verbs. Use short forms.

Example: Come round to my place - we're listening to music. (listen) 1. Look! The dog (swim) _____ in the river!

2. Don't disturb me! I (read) a good book.

3. She (enjoy) her holiday.

4. They (play) a computer game.

5. You (do) your homework.

6. Look! The girls(skip) in the schoolyard.

7. Ssh! They (study) in the library.

8. Listen! Someone (knock) at the door.

IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb: go, play, help, have. l. Our cat football!

2. I computer games in the evening.

3. I my sister with her homework.

4. My sister me to clean my bike.

5. We a new classmate, Mai. 6. We to school from Mondays to Fridays.

7. My father to work at 7 o'clock every morning.

8. On Sundays, my sister shopping.

E. CORRECTION I. Find a mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence.

1. How many tables is there in the classroom?

A B C D 2. What does your sisters do and how old are they?

A B C D 3. This is my chair and that are your chairs.

A B C D 4. There are five benchs and two tables in the house.

A B C D 5. This is my brother and he’s name is Minh.

A B C D 6. The cat is among the lamp and the bed.

24

A B C D 7. There are a cupboard, a dishwasher and a table in the kitchen.

A B C D 8. Is there a television front of the microwave?

A B C D 9. The party will start at seven o’clock on the evening.

A B C D 10. The armchairs aren’t far from the television. They are near to the television.

A B C D 11. It’s Steve's birthday next weekend. I want buy him something A B C D 12. There are two bookshelf in my sister's bedroom.

A B C D 13. Do you keep silently when your teacher is explaining the lessons?

A B C D 14. His house has a strangely shape, and it's next to the supermarket.

A B C D 15. There are lots of small teddy bear on his bed.

A B C D 16. There is a lot of books on the bookshelf in his room.

A B C D 17. I'm so thirsty, but there aren't any water in the bottle.

A B C D 18. The bathtub is behind the shower and the sink in the bathroom.

A B C D 19. He is lying in the sofa to watch a film on TV. A B C D 20. We are standing in front the armchair and taking some photos.

A B C D II. Underline the mistake and then correct it Sentences 1. Where is the flowers?

2. There are a park near Tuan’s house.

3. The TV is between the telephone in the lamp.

4. The mountains are to the left in the house.

5. Where is there behind the house?

6. My school have a big yard 7. Lan watchs TV every day 8. What time do she get up?

9. Mr. Quyen teach English at Yen Nhan secondary school 25

Correction ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ __________________ __________________

10. The students is in the classroom.

__________________

F. READING I. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blanks. or for more architecture before and These by English art and architecture, the distinctive national art and (1) __________ that art may be said to have evolved in the 12th century with the Norman style. Building (2) _________ that time was in what is commonly called the Saxon (3) ________ Anglo-Saxon style, which combined Roman (4) ________ Celtic features, it is represented (5) __________ sparse remains of monasteries, churches, and cathedral crypts, notable (6) __________ the use of long-and-short ashlar stonework (7) _________ churches were small, relatively simple structures, having one or (8) ________ towers and one or three aisles, with wooden or stone roofing.

II. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

Norman style, Romanesque architecture that developed (1) __________ Normandy and England between the 11th and 12th centuries and during the general adoption of Gothic (2) ________ in both countries. Because only shortly before the Norman Conquest (3) ________ England (1066) did Normandy become settled and sophisticated (4) ________ to produce an architecture, the Norman style developed almost simultaneously in (5) _________ two countries; early buildings, erected soon after the conquest, (6) _________ extremely similar.

Eventually, however, the styles of the two countries diverged, (7) _________ the architecture of Normandy drew closer in form to typical French Romanesque, whereas that of England (called Anglo-Norman Architecture) because (8) _________ much more distinctive national tradition.

1. A. on B. at C. over D. in 2. A. engineering B. engineer C. architecture D. architect 3. A. of B. about C. within D. from 4. A. much B. enough C. over D. high 5. A. a B. an C. the D. No article 6. A. is B. are C. has D. have 7. A. and B. or C. as D. because 8. A. one B. the C. an D. a III. Read the text and decide whether the statements are True (T) or False (F) My dream house is a cottage not far from the sea. On the ground-floor, there are four rooms. The first room is my living room, which has a white sofa, a black armchair and a coffee table. There are lots of paintings and trinkets as well. There is also a lamp, French windows with a view of the garden, television set and a phone in the living room. My dream 26

house has a fully-equipped kitchen, including a fridge and a door to the garden. There is a bathroom with a shower and toilet. There is also a study room where I keep my desk and computer. On the first floor, There are three bedrooms and a bathroom.

1. ________ There are 4 rooms in author’s house.

2. ________ There are grey armchair and a coffee table in the living room.

3. ________ There are French windows with a view of the sea.

4. ________ The kitchen in the house is fully equipped.

5. ________ There are three bedrooms and a bathroom on the first floor.

IV. Read and choose the correct answers.

Mr. Smith’s house has got four bedrooms, a living-room, a dining-room, a kitchen, a bathroom and a separate toilet. There is a toilet in the bathroom too. The bedrooms and the bathroom are upstairs, and the living-room, the dining-room, the kitchen and the toilet are downstairs.

The first bedroom is Mr. and Mrs. Smith’s, the second one is Tom’s, the third one is Mary’s, and the fourth one is Anne’s. There is a baby bed in Anne’s bedroom too, but there is no baby living there.

When you enter Mr. Smith’s house, the room on the left is the living-room, and the room on the right is the dining-room. Where is the kitchen? It is behind the dining-room. And where is the toilet? It is straight on, in front of you. There is a garden behind the house, but it is not big. Is there a garden in front of the house too? Yes, there is, but it is very small.

When you-go upstairs, Mr. and Mrs. Smith’s bedroom is on the left. Thebedroom on your right is Tom’s, and the bathroom is between his bedroom andMary’s. Anne’s bedroom is behind Mary’s.

1. Which of the following is correct?

A. Three of Mr. Smith’s bedrooms are upstairs, and one of them is downstairs.

B. Mr. Smith’s four bedrooms are downstairs.

C. Mr. Smith’s four bedrooms are upstairs.

2. Choose the correct sentence: A. There is one toilet in Mr. Smith’s house. It is downstairs.

B. There are two toilets in Mr. Smith’s house. One of them is upstairs.

C. There is one toilet in Mr. Smith’s house. It is upstairs.

3. Choose the correct answer: A. The living room is upstairs.

B. The living room is downstairs.

C. The dining room is upstairs.

4. Choose the correct answer: A. There are two beds in Anne’s bedroom.

B. There is one bed in Anne’s bedroom.

C. There are three beds in Anne’s bedroom.

5. Choose the correct answer: A. There is a small garden in front of the house, and there is a big one behind it.

27

B. There is a small garden in front of the house, and there is a small one behind it.

C. There is a big garden in front of the house, and there is a big one behind it.

6. Choose the correct answer: A. The bathroom is between the first bedroom and the second one.

B. The bathroom is between the second bedroom and the third one.

C. The bathroom is between the third bedroom and the fourth one.

7. Choose the correct answer: A. Tom’s bedroom is behind Mary’s.

B. Mary’s bedroom is in front of Tom’s.

C. Mary’s bedroom is in front of Anne’s.

G. WRITING I. Add “is, are, a, an, some, any” to make a correct sentence.

Ex: There/pencil/ in/ the/ box. There is a pencil in the box.

1. There/ book/ on/ the table. ........................................................................................................................... …….

2. There/ shoes/ under/ the chair. ........................................................................................................................... …….

3. There/ not/ TV/ in/ his room. ........................................................................................................................... ……

4. There/ not/ pens/ on/ my desk. ........................................................................................................................... ……

5. There/ boy/ behind/ that tree. ........................................................................................................................... ……

6. There/ girls/ in front of/ the house. ........................................................................................................................... ……

7. There/ not/ telephone/ in her office. ........................................................................................................................... ……

8. There/ not/ chairs/ downstairs. ........................................................................................................................... ……

II. Use the given words to make complete sentences.

1. house/ a/ Minh/ lake/ a/ lives/ in/ near. ........................................................................................................................... ……

2. yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a. ........................................................................................................................... ……

3. many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/? ........................................................................................................................... ……

4. next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /? ........................................................................................................................... ……

5. hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ 2yiy/ a/ works/ in. ........................................................................................................................... ……

6. there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?

28

........................................................................................................................... ……

7. his/ friend/ in/ family/ My/ Hanoi/ doesn’t/ with/ live. ........................................................................................................................... ……

8. brushes/six/gets/her/o’clock/Hoa/at/up/teeth/and. ........................................................................................................................... ……

9. on/ floor/ classroom/ the/ is/ Our/ first. ........................................................................................................................... ……

10. Minh’s/ six/ There/ in/ rooms/ house/ are. ........................................................................................................................... ……

III. Make sentences from the given words or phrases.

1. There/ a bed/ corner/ the room. ........................................................................................................................... ……

2. Shelves/ above/ the closet. ........................................................................................................................... ……

3.Wardrobe/ the center/ the room. ........................................................................................................................... ……

4.Table/ between/ two chairs. ........................................................................................................................... ……

5. Lamp/ next/ the bed. ........................................................................................................................... ……

6. Table/the right/ the wardrobe. ........................................................................................................................... ……

7.There/ some pictures/ the wall. ........................................................................................................................... ……

8.There/ a window/ the left-side/ the room. ........................................................................................................................... ……

9.Bed/ opposite/ the door. ........................................................................................................................... ……

10.There/ some bottles/ the shelf. ........................................................................................................................... ……

IV. Write sentences about your living room, your kitchen and your bedroom. l. In the living room, there's a sofa, there are two _______________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. In the _______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. In the _______________________________________________________________ =================================================== ANSWER KEYS UNIT 2: MY HOME 29

A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. B 11. B 21. C 31. D 41. C 2. C 12. D 22. D 32. B 42. A 3. A 13. A 23. B 33. D 43. A 4. C 14. D 24. D 34. A 44. B 5. A 15. B 25. A 35. C 45. C 6. A 16. C 26. A 36. B 46. B 7. A 17. A 27. B 37. D 47. A 8. D 18. A 28. D 38. D 48. A 9. B 19. B 29. B 39. C 49. A 10. C 20. C 30. C 40. A 50. C II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.A 4.C 7.C 10.C 13.D 2.B 5.A 8.B 11.A 14.B 3.D 6.D 9.A 12.B 15.C B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.D 11.A 21.C 31.B 41.A 2.B 12.A 22.A 32.C 42.B 3.B 13.D 23.C 33.D 43.C 4.A 14.B 24.B 34.A 44.A 5.B 15.C 25.D 35.C 45.C 6.B 16.B 26.D 36.C 46.B 7.A 17.D 27.B 37.A 47.D 8.D 18.A 28.C 38.D 48.B 9.A 19.D 29.A 39.A 49.A 10.B 20.A 30.B 40.C 50.B

30

C. WORD FORM I. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following sentences 1. drawer

6. difference

11. bookshelves

16. friendly

2. importance

7. visitors

12.shopping

17.nationality

3. conditional

8. creative

13.beautiful

18.Japanese

4. invention

9. widens

14. beautiful

19.sunny

5. beautiful

10. length

15.bakery

20.second

D. VERB FORMS I. Fill in the blanks with is, are, isn't, aren't, do, does.

1. are 2. Do 3. do 4. does 6. aren’t 7. do 8.isn’t 9. are

5. are 10. does

II. Give the correct form of the words in the blank (Using the present simple and present continuous).

1. doesn’t have 2. comes, 3. don’t drive 4. are you 5. does…live is staying go talking lives 6. are, am 7. is playing 8.am not 9. does… go 10. Are, are talking goes III. Complete the sentences with the -ing form of the verbs. Use short forms.

2. I’m reading 3. She’s enjoying 4. They’re playing 1. The dog’s swimming 5. You’re doing 6. are skipping 7.They’re studying 8.Someone’s knocking IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb: go, play, help, have.

1. plays 2. play 3. 3. help 4. helps 5. have 6. go 7. goes 8. goes E. CORRECTION I. Find a mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence.

1.B 6.B 11.C 2.A 7.A 12.B 3.C 8.C 13.B 4.B 5.C 31

9.C 10.C

14.B 15.C

16. A 17.C 18.A 19.B 20.A

II. Underline the mistake and then correct it 1. is → are 2. are→ is 3. in → and 4. to → on 6. have → has 7. watchs → 8.do→ does 9.teach → watches teaches

5. where → what 10. is → are

F. READING I. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blanks.

1. architecture 2. Before 3. Or 4. And 5. by 6. For 7. these 8. More II. Read the following text and complete the statements below.

1. D 2.C 3.A 4.B 5. C 6.B 7.A 8.D III. Read the text and decide whether the statements are True (T) or False (F) 1. F 2. F 3.F 4. T 5. T IV. Read and choose the correct answers.

1. C 2.B 3.B 4.A 5. B 6.B 7.C G. WRITING I. Add “is, are, a, an, some, any” to make a correct sentence 1. There is a book on the table.

2. There are some shoes under the chair.

3. There isn’t a TV in his room.

4. There aren’t any pens on my desk.

5. There is a boy behind that tree.

6. There are some girls in front of the house.

7. There isn’t a telephone in her office.

8. There aren’t any chairs downstairs.

II. Use the given words to make complete sentences.

1. Minh lives in a house near a lake.

2. There is a big yard in front of our school.

3. Are there many flowers to the right of the museum?

4. What is there next to the photocopy store?

5. My father works in a hospital in the city.

6. How many people are there in Linh’s family?

7. My friend doesn’t live with his family in Ha Noi. 8. Hoa gets up at six o’clock and brushes her teeth.

9. Our classroom is on the first floor.

10. There are six rooms in Minh’s house.

32

III. Make sentences from the given words or phrases.

1. There is a bed in the corner of the room.

2. The shelves are above the closet.

3. The wardrobe is in the center of the room.

4. The table is between the two chairs.

5. The lamp is next to the bed.

6. The table is on the right of the wardrobe.

7. There are some pictures on the wall.

8. There is a window on the left-side of the room.

9. The bed is opposite the door.

10. There are some bottles on the shelf.

IV. Write sentences about your living room, your kitchen and your bedroom. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ =================================================== UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group B. gate C. play D. parent 1. A. amazing 2. A. help B. ending C. equip D. setting 3. A. sailor B. photo C. sold D. fold 4. A. fair B. train C. wait D. gain 5. A. tiger B. hint C. five D. slide 6. A. cooker B. ancient C. cover D. come 7. A. union B. university C. but D. humour 8. A. visible B. bring C. building D. bomb 9. A. choke B. chemist C. watch D. catch 10. A. stove B. cold C. worry D. hold 33

11. A. please 12. A. ears 13. A. funny 14. A. confident 15. A. shy 16. A. lamps 17. A. brother 18. A. careful 19. A. kitchen 20. A. subject 21. A. temple 22. A. elbow 23. A. psychology 24. A. brilliant 25. A. blonde 26. A. best 27. A. copy 28. A. book 29. A. job 30. A. airport 31. A. ball 32. A. pen 33. A. brother 34. A. copy 35. A. pencil 36. A. kind 37. A. request 38. A. foot 39. A. finger 40. A. creative 41. A. project 42. A. judo 43. A. gets 44. A. mouth 45. A. with 34

B. read B. eyes B. curious B. kind B. pretty B. desks B. nose B. class B. children B. music B. pretty B. bowl B. positive B. barbecue B. ponytail B. part B. happy B. beautiful B. tab B. speak B. bell B. pull B. beach B. pet B. pocket B. confident B. project B. book B. leg B. think B. leg B. elbow B. brings B. house B. mouth

C. head C. hands C. chubby C. nice C. curly C. lights C. sofa C. city C. chat C. study C. depend C. blow C. patient C. climbing C. body C. pie C. beast C. butterfly C. pen C. notebook C. bag C. bath C. pass C. prize C. bed C. nice C. neck C. food C. neck C. idea C. evening C. nose C. takes C. country C. thanks

D. teacher D. cheeks D. lunch D. reliable D. pony D. legs D. poster D. cupboard D. choir D. lunch D. pencil D. cow D. present D. neighbour D. potter D. pen D. pull D. professional D. neighbor D. spoon D. park D. pick D. book D. boy D. peach D. like D. exciting D. look D. elbow D. big D. neck D. blond D. stops D. about D. three

B. summer C. sugar D. sound 46. A. sofa 47. A. city B. special C. bicycle D. center B. son C. suit D. sure 48. A. sun 49. A. machine B. choice C. cheap D. change B. sugar C. sight D. sand 50. A. seat II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. reliable B. helpful C. active D. friendly 2. A. curious B. confident C. competitive D. talkative 3. A. volunteer B. basketball C. sensitive D. magazine 4. A. hard-working B. wonderful C. unfriendly D. intelligent 5. A. generous B. patient C. attractive D. curious B. swimming C. cupboard D. active 6. A. backyard 7. A. prepare B. cuisine C. between D. crazy 8. A. peaceful B. thrilling C. Korean D. rubbish 9. A. historic B. curious C. fantastic D. excited 10. A. volunteer B. museum C. creative D. department 11. A. desert B. prepare C. wardrobe D. palace 12. A. classmate B. lucky C. travel D. dislike 13. A. surround B. crazy C. funny D. racing 14. A. serious B. confident C. equipment D. interview 15. A. competition B. activity C. reliable D. Antarctica B. MULTIPLE CHOICE III. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Our class is going to____a picnic at the zoo on Saturday. Would you like to come with us?

A. have B. take C. pass D. go 2. It’s ____ to go home. It’s so late.

A. now B. sure C. time D. like 3. Please turn ____the lights. The room is so dark.

A. with B. at C. in D. on 4. Can you _____ the tables and chairs _____ the next room? There are some more students.

A. move - to B. take - in C. move - in D. take - on 35

5. Daisy is very ____ to take the rest. She is a very good student.

A. kind B. confident C. friendly D. talkative 6. I like reading "Muc Tim" very much. It's my _____magazine.

A. nice B. quick C. funny D. favourite 7. My close friend, Mai, has a____face and ____ hair.

A. big - black B. small - short C. round - black D. short - long 8. My best friend is kind and_____. He often makes me laugh.

A. funny B. nice C.shy D. boring 9. My brother has____short ____ hair.

A. a - straight B. - long C. - curly D. a - black 10.On Sunday Nam_____his parents in the field as usual.

A. helps B. help C. is helping D. helping 11. On Saturday Tom's parents____him _____London to see the new film.

A. are taking - to B. taking - to C. are going - to D. are going - in 12.Next summer I am working as a_____teacher in a village near HoaBinh City.

A. good B. nice C. favourite D. volunteer 13.The Summer Camp is for students_____between 10 and 15.

A. age B. aged C. aging D. ages 14. We are visiting a milk farm to see____they ____milk, cheese, and butter.

A. why - do B. - do C.how - make D. how - do 15.Linda has ____hair an big ____eyes.

A. blonde – small B.a black - blue C. blonde - blue D. black – long 16. Mai is a_____girl. She can chat with her friends all day without feeling bored.

A. talk B. talking C. talkative D. talked 17. Tom attended the English exams_____because he prepared very well.

A. confident B. confidently C. confidential D. confidence .

18. Nam’s classmates like talking and studying with him because of his______ A. kindness B. kindly C. unkind D. unkindness 19. Nam is a(n)_____student. He spends a lot of time doing all his home work without his parents' help at home.

A. independent B. independently C. independence D. dependence 20. Would you like______on a picnic with my family tomorrow?

A. go B. went C. going D. to go 21. Tom's friends laugh a lot when he tells them some_______stories.

36

A. funny B. hard-working C. easy D. boring 22. He looks so_______. His face turns red when he talks with strangers.

A. friendly B. creative C. clever D. shy 23. He wears thick . They make him so intelligent.

A. shoulders B. tails C. glasses D. necks 24. She's very beautiful. She has long black and brown .

A. face/ fingers B.hair/eyes C.nose/foots D. arm/ears 25. My younger brother has a round ____ and broad .

A. shoulder/ hands B. mouth/eyes C. face/ shoulders D. elbow/ cheek 26.My kids spend hours chatting ______ the phone ______ their friends.

A. at - with B. on - to C. to - with D. in - about 27.Could you turn the television ______? I want to watch the news.

A. on B. off C. down D. up 28.My best friend ______ a round face and big eyes.

A. have B. has C. is D. gets 29.My brother is really ______. He always does his homework.

A. hard-working B. serious C. confident D. patient 30.When eating, most Vietnamese people hold chopsticks in their right ______.

A. arm B. leg C. finger D. hand 31.Which do you prefer, straight hair or ______ hair?

A. long B. blonde C. curly D. thick 32.The kids are ______ their tricycles around the playground.

A. playing B. riding C. taking D. driving 33.Norman is very shy, but his brother is ______.

A. easygoing B. calm C. patient D. outgoing 34.______ explain this grammar for me, please? ~ Sure.

A. Can you B. Could you please C. Would you like you mind 35.Would you like to come for dinner tonight? - ______ A. Yes, certainly. B. I’d love to. Thanks.

C. Not at all. thanks.

36.His two _________ look so small and funny.

A. nose B. neck C. ears D. eye 37.The cat is wagging its beautiful long _________.

37

D. Would

D.

No,

A. tail B. foot C. leg D. hand 38.I love sitting on my father’s wide _________.

A. arms B. knees C. shoulders D. foot 39.She looks pretty with a sharp _________ on her face.

A. tooth B. nose C. elbow D. head 40.This baby has _________ cheeks; everyone wants to kiss them.

A. chubby B. finger C.fur 41.Don’t judge a person by his/her _________.

A. chubby B. appearance C. neck 42.Ms. Lan has a(n) _________ lifestyle. She seems to be never bored.

A. competitive B. active C. generous D. patient 43.My teacher is very _________. She never smiles in her lessons.

A. serious B. confident C. reliable D. responsible 44.You need to be _________ to teach children.

A. shy B. patient C. volunteer D. sporty 45.We are all _________ about the people who live in that villa.

A. freedom-loving B. independent C. curious D. friendly 46.I don’t like his _________. He’s too serious and competitive.

A. finger B. elbow C. personality D.leg 47.Mr. Lam was _________ of his parents when he was just 16 years old.

A. independent B. caring C. shoulders D. sensitive 48.My mother is _________ to everyone. She loves helping others.

A. funny B. boring C. kind D.fur 49.Don’t worry. He is a _________ person. He can help you.

A. funny B. reliable C. sensitive D. tail 50.The school year in Viet Nam starts ________ September 5th.

A. in B. on C. at D. since C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. It’s nice meeting such a ________ person.

(FRIEND) 2. Lan is very ________. She’s always on the phone, chatting to (TALK) friends.

3. Huy is very ________. He’s not controlled in any way by other people or things.

38

(DEPEND)

4. I think Jane is very ________. She is easily hurt by the small things.

5. Viet is very ________. He always has a lot of new ideas.

6. You must be ________ when you open that door.

7. I think you look very ________ in that hat.

8. Tom is the most ________ person I’ve ever met 9. I’m ________ about the book she’s supposed to be writing.

(SENSE)

(CREATE) (CARE) (FUN) (BORE) (CURIOSITY ) 10. You can trust John. He is very ________.

(RELY) 11. She takes an ______ part in school life.

(ACTIVATE) 12. Our countryside is__________ at an alarming rate.

(APPEAR) 13. Green is much better than _________old white.

(BORE) 14. There is a lot of ________between rival airlines.

(COMPLET E) 15. She’s completely lacking in ________ (CONFIDE) 16. I’m burning with__________- you must tell me who won!

(CURIOUS) 17. Her friends take advantage of her __________ (GENEROUS ) 18. A wedding on that scale takes a lot of ____________ (ORGANIZE) 19. Of course, this is just a__________ (PERSON) 20. How __________are the local weather forecast?

(RELY) 21. People in my country are very warm and ____________ (FRIEND) 22. An _________ is a home for children whose parents are dead.

(ORPHAN) 23. L.A Hill is a ____________ writer.

(HUMOR) 24. I’m ______________ sorry for the delay.

(EXTREME) 25. She looks more __________ than her sister.

(BEAUTY) II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

You know that moment when you meet a person and (1. INSTANT)________realize that you are going to be best friend? It might be as simple as you both eat burritos for most of your meals or both cry during the same State Farm commercial. Friends are the family you choose, and a good friend is (2. VALUE)______Would Romy be able to make it through her high school (3. UNION)_______without awesome Michele? I think not. Would Cher be able to get over herself and (4. EVENT)_______make out with the young hot Paul Rudd without Dion? Heck no! Building (5. FRIEND)_______can be awkward and a bit (6.

STRESS)_________So how do you know when it’s worth it to put yourself out there and make someone your new best friend?

39

D. VERB FORMS I. Give the correct form of verb at the simple tense and the continuous tense.

1. Sit down! A strange dog ______ (run) to you.

2. My mom often _______ (buy) meat from the butcher’s.

3. My brothers ________ (not/ drink) coffee at the moment.

4. Look! Those people .________ (climb) the mountain so fast.

5. That girl ___________(cry) loudly in the party now.

6. These students always _____________ (wear) warm clothes in summer.

7. What _______________(you/ do) in the kitchen?

8. I never ______________ (eat) potatoes.

9. The 203 bus ________________ (set off) every fifteen minutes.

10.Tonight, we ______________ (not/go) to our teacher’s wedding party.

II. Read the text then give the correct form of verb.

It(0. be) is Sunday evening and my friends and I (1. be) __________ Jane’s birthday party. Jane (2. wear) ___________a beautiful long dress and (3. stand) _____ next to her boyfriend. Some guests (4. drink) ______wine or beer in the corner of the room. Some of her relatives (5. dance) ______ in the middle of the room. Most people (6.sit) __________on chairs, (7. enjoy) ________ foods and (8. chat) _______with one another.

We often (9. go) ________ to our friends’ birthday parties. We always (10. dress) ________ well and (11. travel) _________by taxi. Parties never (12. make) ________us bored because we like.

III. Complete the text. Use the present simple.

My best friend My best friend is Hannah. She (1. live) next door to me. We (2. go) to the same school but we are in different classes.

I (3. walk) to school but Hannah (4. go) by bike, because she always (5. get up) late. After school we (6. finish) _____ our homework first, then we (7. listen) to our favourite music. I (8. like) R&B, but Hannah (9.hate) it. She (10. think) it’s boring. She (11. love) rock music.

IV. Complete the conversation with the correct form of the verbs in brackets in the present continuous.

Jack: I'm bored.

Nick: Why don't you find something to do?

Jack: What can I do?

40

Nick: There are lots of things you can do. This is what I (1. do) this weekend. On Friday evening I (2. meet) Jane. We (3. go) to the cinema.

Then in Saturday, Tom and I (4. play) table-tennis. Then we (5. have) lunch with Sam. After lunch, Tom and Sam (6. start) their new judo classes. I (7. not go) with them because my dad (8.take) me to a basketball match.

It's my mum's birthday on Sunday. She (9. not have) a big party. We (10. have) lunch at a nice restaurant near our house.

Jack: Wow. You are busy. Can I come with you to the cinema on Friday?

Nick: Of course, you can, Jack.

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. My sister is very seriously and hard-working in her study.

A B C D 2. Ride a bike at the weekend is my best friend's hobby.

A B C D 3. She is very cared, so she always helps her mother do the housework.

A B C D 4. My friend has a short brown hair and an oval face.

AB C D 5. Because Nga is very keen on the school's singing competition, she is taking part A B C on it tomorrow.

D 6. I have an important maths exam tomorrow afternoon, so I do a lot of maths A B C exercises at home this evening.

D 7. We have a lot of assignments to do. Therefore, we are going to the cinema A B C with you tonight.

D 8. I have new pencil, a pencil sharpener and a pencil case.

41

A B C D 9. The painting competition will start at his school on the 17th of October.

A B C D 10. She usually plays the piano every Monday evening, but today she watch cartoons A B C D with her younger sister.

11. There are a table, four chairs, two pictures and a vase in the living room.

A B C D 12. There aren't a lot of posters in the wall in his bedroom.

A B C D 13. My dog has a long tail, big eyes and a yellow fur.

A B C D 14. She has a birthday party with a big birthday cake and a lot of candles at home A B C D at present.

15. She is short hair and big eyes A B C D 16. My new friend, Zoe, is very friend and helpful A B C D 17. Tomorrow, John and I is playing basketball with our team A B C D 18. This student are very smart, studious and well-behaved A B C D 19. My mother have an oval face and lovely smile A B C D 20.Would you like going to the movies tonight?

A B C D II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Find and correct it.

Sentence

42

Correction

1. I live in a apartment on Nguyen Trai Street.

2. Listen! Someone knocks at the door.

3. What do you doing tomorrow?

4. There is some new furnitures in the living room.

5. My mother have short curly hair and big blue eyes.

6. He drives very careless and often causes accidents.

7. John usually go shopping with his mother.

8. There is many books on her bookshelves.

9. Would you like drinking tea or coffee?

10. Why don’t you has dinner with us?

______________ _____________ ______________ _____________ ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________ ______________ ______________

F. READING I. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the le there real sticking about are legally the at Friendship is an interesting kind of love. There’s no contrast (1) ________ binding you two together, there’s no unspoken rule (2) ________loving each other unconditionally, and there’s no (3) ________blinding commitment to the opposite person other than what you are willing to put in to the relationship.

But maybe these (4)________the reasons why our relationships are so valuable. The option is always (5) ________ to back out at any time, and yet, with the really, really authentic ones, we never do.

Because (6) ________the end of the day- after the breakups and divorces and estrangements- we choose (7) ________companions we want in our lives, and they are the ones worth (8) ________around for.

II. Read the article and decide whether the statements are True (T) or False (F).

As we know, these special relationship do more than we just get us by. Friends are our concert buddies. They’re the people that come over to trap a mouse that’s in the apartment.

They’re the ones who use through relationship blunders and changes at work. Research has also found that friends helps us live longer.

43

Aristotle once described a true friend as a “single soul dwelling in two bodies”- but what differentiates a true, lasting friendship from the other, temporary social bonds?

According to Robert Rowney, D.O., a certified psychiatrist and the director of the Cleveland Clinic mood disorder unit, there are certain habits that genuine friends possess, which make them more like family. And it’s these characteristics- and sometimes even tough love – that create that indescribable bond.

1. Friends see us through relationship blunders and changes at work 2. Research has found that friend don’t help us live longer 3. A true friend is described as “single soul dwelling in two bodies” 4. According to Robert Rowney, there are certain habits genuine friends possess.

5. Sometimes even tough love can’t create that indescribable bond.

III. Read and answer the questions. −Hi pals! My name is Susy. I’m thin and medium high. My hair is short, curlyand blonde.

My eyes are brown. I’m clever and hard-working. My favourite color is red. I love fashion. −Hey guys! My name is Caroline. I’m thin and sporty. My hair is long, straight and brown. My eyes are brown and big also. I’m talkative and noisy. I like rock music. −What’s up people? I’m Michael. I’m tall and handsome, my hair is brown and straight.

My face is round. I’m patient and kind of lazy. I always wear a cap. −Nice to meet you! My name is Ryan. I’m skinny and short, my hair is black and my eyes are black too. I’m shy and good tempered. I like sports and video games. −How’re you doing friends? I am Kate. I’m tall and thin. My hair is short, straight and black. I have a small face. I love the green color.

1. What is Susy’s hair like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

2. What are Caroline’s eyes like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

3. What is Michael like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

4. What does Ryan like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

5. What color does Kate love? …………………………………………………………………………………….

IV. Read the passage, then answer the questions.

44

Trung is a pupil in class 7A. His full name is Pham QuocTrung. He is 13 years old now, but he will be 14 on his next birthday. Trung lives with his parents at 2/34 Nguyen Trai Street. Trung’s house isn’t large but it’s very comfortable. It has a bright living room, two lovely bedrooms and a large, modern bathroom and kitchen. There is a small yard in front of his house. Trung’s mother grows flowers in the yard. According to Trung, his house is the nicest house.

1. What does Trung do? ...........................................................................................................................

2. What class is he in? ...........................................................................................................................

3. What’s his family name? ...........................................................................................................................

4. What’s his address? ...........................................................................................................................

5. Is Trung’s house big? ...........................................................................................................................

6. How many rooms are there in his house? ...........................................................................................................................

7. Is there a yard in front of his house? ...........................................................................................................................

8. Are there any flowers in the yard? ...........................................................................................................................

G. WRITING I. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first.

Ex: There are twenty classes in our school → Our school has twenty classes.

1. Our school has forty-two classrooms.

There ................................................................................................................ ……

2. The bakery is to the left of my house.

My house ........................................................................................................... ……

3. Mr Minh has a son,Trung.

Mr Minh ........................................................................................................... ……

4. Trang is riding her bike to school.

Trang is going .................................................................................................. ……

45

5. Huyen walks to school every afternoon.

Huyen goes ....................................................................................................... ……

6. Does your class have forty students?

Are .................................................................................................................... …..?

7. That motorbike belongs to MrTrung.

That is ............................................................................................................... ……

8. Does your father cycle to work?

Does your father get ......................................................................................... …..?

9. He goes to work at seven fifteen.

He goes to work at a ......................................................................................... ……

10.This exercise is very difficult and he can’t do it.

This exercise is too ........................................................................................... ……

II. Write the correct sentences using the cue words.

1. He/ often/ have/ breakfast/ late. ........................................................................................................................... …..

2. You/ do/ the housework/ at the moment? ........................................................................................................................... …..

3. I/ not/ go/ to school/ on weekends. ........................................................................................................................... …..

4. John’s girlfriend/ wear/ a red T-shirt/ now. ........................................................................................................................... ……

5. They/ like/ beer or wine? ........................................................................................................................... ……

6. What/ he/ usually/ do/ at night? ........................................................................................................................... ……

7. The teacher/ never/ lose/ his temper. ........................................................................................................................... ……

8. Why/ you/ listen/ to music/ loudly now? ........................................................................................................................... ……

III. Arrange the words to make correct sentences.

1. books/ are/ on/ there/ bookshelf/ many/ the. ........................................................................................................................... ……

2.many/ there/ how/ in/ are/ books/ school bag/ your? ........................................................................................................................... ……

46

3.television/ the/ there/ a/ living room/in/ is. ........................................................................................................................... ……

4.forty-five/ class/ students/ there/ my/ are/ in. ........................................................................................................................... ……

5.living room/ tables/ in/ there/ the/ are/ two. ........................................................................................................................... ……

6.many/ there/ in/ how/ are/ the/ doors/ classroom? ........................................................................................................................... ……

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) about your best friend.

Suggestions: 1. What is his/her name?

2. How old is he/she?

3. What is his/ her hobby?

4. What does he/she do in his/ her free time?

5. What do you often do together? …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ===================================================

47

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. D 11.C 21.B 31.D 41.C 2. C 12.D 22.D 32.C 42.D 3. A 13.B 23.A 33.C 43.B 4. A 14.A 24.C 34.D 44.C 5. B 15.A 25.B 35.D 45.A 6. B 16.D 26.A 36.B 46.C 7. C 17.A 27.B 37.D 47.B 8. D 18.C 28.D 38.C 48.D 9. B 19.D 29.C 39.A 49.A 10. C 20.B 30.C 40.C 50.B II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.A 4.B 7.D 10.A 13.A 2.C 5.C 8.C 11.B 14.C 3.A 6.A 9.B 12.D 15.A B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

48

1.A 2.C 3.D 4.A 5.B 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.A

11.A 12.D 13.B 14.C 15.A 16.C 17.B 18.A 19.A 20.D

21.A 22.D 23.C 24.B 25.C 26.B 27.A 28.B 29.A 30.D

31.C 32.B 33.D 34.A 35.B 36.C 37.A 38.B 39.C 40.C

41.B 42.B 43.A 44.B 45.C 46.C 47.A 48.C 49.B 50.B

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following sentences 1. friendly 6. careful 11. active 16. curiosity 21. friendly 2. talkative 7. funny 12.

17. Generosity 22.orphanage disappearing 3. independent 8.boring 13. Boring 18.

23.humorous Organization 4.sensitive 9. curious 14. competition 19. Personal 24.extremely 5.creative 10.reliable 15. confidence 20. Reliable 25.beautiful II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

1. instantly 2. invaluable 3. reunion 4. eventually 5. friendships 6. stressful D. VERB FORMS I. Give the correct form of verb at the simple tense and the continuous tense.

1. is running 2. buys 3. aren’t drinking 4. are climbing 5. is crying 6. wear 7. are you doing 8. eat 9. sets off 10. aren’t going II. Read the text then give the correct form of verb.

1.are 4. are drinking 7. enjoying 49

10. dress

2. is wearing

5. are dancing

8. chatting

11. travel

3. standing

6. are sitting

9. go

12. make

III. Complete the text. Use the present simple.

1. lives 4. goes 7. listen 2. go 5. gets up 8. like 3. walk

6. finish

10. thinks 11. loves

9. hates

IV. Complete the conversation with the correct form of the verbs in brackets in the present continuous.

1. am doing 2. am meeting 3. are going 4. are playing 5. are having 6. are starting 7. am not going 8. is taking 9. .isn't having 10. are having E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase in each sentence that needs correcting.

1.A 6.C 11.A 16.C 2.A 7.C 12.C 17.B 3.B 8.A 13.D 18.B 4.B 5.D

9.B 10.D

14.A 15.A

II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Find and correct it.

1. a → an 2. knocks→ 3. do → are 4. furnitures → is knocking furniture 6. careless → 7. go → goes 8.is→ are 9.drinking → to carelessly drink

19.A 20.B

5. have → has 10. has → have

F. READING I. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the le 1. legally 2. about 3. real 4. are 5. there 6. at 7.the 8.sticking II. Read the text and decide whether the statements are True (T) or False (F).

1. T 2. F 3.T 4. T 5. F III. Read and answer the questions.

50

1. It is short, curly, and blonde.

2. They are brown and big.

3. He is patient and kind of lazy.

4. He likes sports and video games.

5. She loves green.

IV. Read the passage, then answer the questions.

1. He is a student.

2. He is in class 7A. 3. His family name is Pham.

4. It is at 2/34 Nguyen Trai Street.

5. No, it isn’t.

6. There are five rooms.

7. Yes, there is.

8. Yes, there are.

G. WRITING I. Complete the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first.

1. There are forty-two classrooms in our school.

2. My house is to the right of the bakery.

3. Mr. Minh is Tiling's father.

4. Trang is going to school by bike.

5. Huyen goes to school on foot every afternoon.

6. Are there forty students in your class?

7. That is Trung’s motorbike.

8. Does your father get to work by bike?

9. He goes to work at a quarter past seven.

10. This exercise is too difficult for him to do.

II. Write the correct sentences using the cue words.

1. He often has breakfast late.

2. Are you doing the housework at the moment?

3. I do not go to school on weekends.

4. John’s girlfriend is wearing a red T-shirt now.

5. Do they like beer or wine?

6. What does he usually do at night?

7. The teacher never loses his temper.

51

8. Why are you listening to music loudly now?

III. Arrange the words to make correct sentences.

1. There are many books on the bookshelf.

2. How many books are there in your school bag?

3. There is a television in the living room.

4. There are forty-five students in my class.

5. There are two tables in the living room.

6. How many doors are there in the classroom?

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) about your best friend.

Suggestions: 1. What is his/her name?

2. How old is he/she?

3. What is his/ her hobby?

4. What does he/she do in his/ her free time?

5. What do you often do together?

UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. machine B. drive C. police D. pizza 2. A. magazine B. side C. hide D. high 3. A. prepare B. fresh C. equal D. eleven 4. A. busy B. gum C. summary D. lunch 5. A. kite B. idea C. roadside D. dinner 6. A. picture B. ticket C. biology D. cinema 7. A. these B. metre C. secret D. English 8. A. listen B. magazine C. miss D. kite 9. A. teach B. heart C. peach D. team 10. A. business B. bus C. number D. study 11. A. live B. wide C. bicycle D. exciting 12. A. feet B. seat C. near D. team 13. A. cried B. city C. think D. terrible 14. A. great B. heat C. cheek D. peaceful 15. A. historic B. expensive C. office D. finally B. pleasure C. sleepy D. cheap 16. A. peaceful 17. A. exciting B. quiet C. wide D. terrible 18. A. crowded B. interested C. bored D. polluted 52

B. theatres C. streets D. parks 19. A. shops 20. A. narrow B. crowd C. now D. about B. ship C. kite D. chip 21. A. hill 22. A. cheap B. great C. peace D. meal 23. A. evening B. extreme C. scene D. excite B. village C. message D. shortage 24. A. garage 25. A. field B. movie C. quiet D. piece 26. A. films B. city C. nice D. polite B. wide C. quiet D. exciting 27. A. big 28. A. cheap B. sleepy C. near D. peaceful B. sea C. team D. street 29. A. heavy 30. A. bleed B. heat C. head D. tea 31. A. arrive B. quickly C. historic D. city 32. A. teens B. see C. coffee D. street B. evening C. exciting D. eve 33. A. convenient 34. A. expensive B. opposite C. those D. noisy 35. A. ideal B. cinema C. exciting D. difficult 36. A. sorry B. speak C. soft D. shoes 37. A. lesson B. short C. wash D. finish 38. A. cinema B. sugar C. mansion D. tissue 39. A. sing B. special C. social D. artificial 40. A. sheet B. sad C. show D. shut 41. A. love B. hotel C. mother D. brother 42. A. lake B. place C. paddy D. stadium 43. A. store B. sister C. factory D. picture 44. A. rice B. river C. city D. village 45. A. sing B. mine C. hit D. sit 46. A. finger B. lip C. light D. thin 47. A. bean B. pea C. meat D. heavy B. meter C. tent D. never 48. A. desert 49. A. dozen B. box C. bottle D. body 50. A. farm B. bar C. tall D. car II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. pollute B. temple C. station D. palace 2. A. receipt B. backyard C. palace D. dislike 3. A. exciting B. terrible C. cathedral D. historic 4. A. organize B. zodiac C. serious D. fantastic 5. A. memorial B. convenient C. generous D. appearance 6. A. football B. compare C. ceiling D. table

53

7. A. cleaning 8. A. volunteer 9. A. tradition 10. A. gallery 11. A. pleasure 12. A. decide 13. A. restaurant 14. A. capital 15. A. direction

B. duty B. engineer B. opera B. dangerous B. hurry B. railway B. terrible B. pagoda B. afternoon

C. beauty C. benefit C. different C. referee

C. arrive D. statue C. temple D. palace C. gallery D. expensive C. countryside D. motorbike C. cathedral

D. pollute D. Vietnamese D. capital D. personal

D. fantastic

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. No one else in the class plays the guitar_____John.

A.as well B. as far as C. so well as D. as soon as 2. The town was nearer____we thought it would be.

A. then B.that C. as D. than 3. The economic conditions today are ____ they were in the past.

A. much more good B. much better than C. much better D. the best than 4. Jane is not_____her brother.

A. more intelligent as B. intelligent as C. so intelligent as D. so intelligent that 5. He drives as____his father does.

A. careful as B. more carefully C. the most careful D. carefully as 6. I’ll be there ____I can.

A. sooner as B. no sooner as C. as soon as D. soonest as 7. Mr. Lam cannot earn _____his wife.

A.as many money as B. as much money as C.as many money than D. as much money than 8. I like English _____French.

A. than B. more C. less D. better than 9. My car is ____yours.

A. more fast and economical than B. more fast and more economical than C. faster and economical as D. faster and more economical than 10. Of the two sisters, Linda_____.

A. is beautiful B. the most beautiful C. is more beautiful D. is so beautiful as 11. Is there a theatre ____your neighbourhood?

A. in B. on C. at D. with 12. _______the second turning the right.

A. Take - in B. Take - on C. Get - in D. Get - on 54

13. _____nice the weather is!

A. What B. How C. Which D. Who 14. The map ____that the art gallery is nearer than the cathedral. Shall we go there first?

A. speaks B. asks C. says D. talks 15. A_____is a place where we go to buy stamps or send letters.

A. library B.post office C. cinema D. school 16. The air in this area is______with smoke from factories.

A. polluted B. fresh C. noisy D. clean 17. There are many shops near here, so the streets are very busy and ______during the day.

A. noise B. narrow C. quiet D. noisy 18. It is______to live far from the market and the supermarket.

A .easy B. inconvenient C. convenient D. comfortable 19. The people in Hoi An are incredibly _____and ________.

A. friendly – help B. friendly – helpful C. friendship - helpless D. friend - helpfully 20. The weather is nice, so I enjoy doing _______activities.

A. outdoor B. inside C. outdoors D. boring 21. The cinema is________the corner of the street.

A. on B. in C. at D. into 22. Going by taxi is more_______than going by bus.

A. cheaper B. faster C. easier D. expensive 23. The streets in the Old Quarter in Ha Noi are not wide. They are _______.

A. exciting B. noisy C. narrow D. quiet 24. A_______is a place where we can buy medicines, soap, and make-up.

A. chemist’s B. grocer’s C. square D. temple 25. David's exam results are________than Nick's.

A. good B. well C. better D. important 26. Janet is not happy because her results in the competition are_____than her sister's.

A. bad B. good C. better D. worse 27. _________people own motorbikes now than ten years ago.

A. Many B. Much C. More D. Some 28.This type of car is economical than that type.

A. more B. much C. many D. as 29. ________go past the traffic lights, and _____ turn left.

A. First - than B. First - then C. Then - first D. Finally - then 30. London, the capital city of England, is a______city with many old buildings, and beautiful parks.

A. history B. historic C. largest D. larger 31. When you ride your bike on the streets, you should follow the directions of the____.

A. bus stop B.traffic lights C. railway station D. palace 32. I want to see famous paintings, so I'm going to visit a(n)____at the weekend.

55

A. art gallery B. temple C.cathedral D. square 33. My father took me to the______ to commemorate the national heroes A. bridge B. stadium C. statue D. memorial 34. I couldn't have a trip to Hoi An Ancient Town because I caught a cold lastweek.

That was so_____for me.

A. convenient B. quiet C.simple D. terrible 35. He likes living in Da Nang City because the people here are______hospitable.

A. incredibly B. inconveniently C. noisily D. busily 36. She doesn't likes moving in the rush hours because the traffic is so_____.

A. heavy B. large C.difficult D. exciting 37. First ___ the second left. Then go ahead. You will see the museum.

A. turn/ away B. take/ straight C.go/ right D. pick/ left 38. ____can I get to 899 Cafe? - Go to the end of Hong Bang Road. It's ____your right.

A. Where/ on B.W here/in C. How/ on D. How/ in streets than Da Lat City.

39. Ho Chi Minh City has A. crowded B. much crowded C. more crowded D. crowdedly 40. I like the atmosphere in Can Tho. It's____ than in Ha Noi. A. more quiet B. quieter C.quiet D. quietly 41.What is there ________ our neighborhood?

A. in B. on C. at D. from 42.Turn left ________ the traffic lights and the restaurant is ________ your right A. in - on B. at - in C.at - on D. on - in 43.________ the second turning on the right and then go straight.

A. Cross B. Get C. Turn D. Take 44.He is much ________ now, but he’s still taking medication.

A. good B. gooder C. better D. more better 45.The air in many cities is heavily ________ with vehicle exhaust fumes.

A. polluted B. crowded C. wasted D. contained 46.I’m just going to the ________ to buy some medicines and bandage.

A cinema B. chemist’s C. restaurant D. grocery 47.My neighborhood is very ________ because everything is near my house.

A. convenient B. exciting C. comfortable D. inconvenient 48.________ go to the museum this weekend? - Good idea!

A. Let’s B. Why don’t C. Shall we D. Could you 49.Living in a city is ________ convenient than living in the countryside.

A. a lot B. much C. many D. more 50.- Is there a supermarket in your neighborhood?

- ________.

A. No, it isn’t. The supermarket is near my house.

56

B. Yes. There it one not far from my house.

C. There is a supermarket in my neighborhood.

D. The supermarket is opposite the park.

D. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. It is a great………to have the school so near.

(CONVENIENT)

2. In the spring the place is…………with skiers.

(CROWD)

3. I still find the job………..

(EXCITE)

4.The area is of special………….interest.

(HISTORY)

5. The conceit of that man is…………!

(CREDIT)

6. The ………..stands on the village green.

(MEMORY)

7. Unfortunately we lack the resources to………..

(MODERN)

8. They hope for a………….settlement of the dispute.

(PEACE)

9. ………….on British beaches is a serious problem.

(POLLUTE)

10. He is………….confident that they can succeed.

(QUIET)

11. Ha Noi is a _____capital. There are a lot of famous,

(FAME)

ancient museums, pagodas or temples.

12. He bought a new car in order to move ______in a big city

(CONVENIENT)

13. The environment in our city is ____with a lot of dirty

(POLUTE)

gases from private cars.

14. I like enjoying clean air and _____in the countryside.

(PEACE)

15. Don’t go straight ahead. It’s very_____

(DANGER)

16. My neighborhood is ______for good and cheap

(FAME)

restaurants 17. They are getting along with their_____.

(NEIGHBORHOOD)

18. She ‘s beautiful with a________ smile.

(LOVE)

57

(LUCK)

19. ______, the barber cut my hair too short.

(DIFFER)

20. Each of my friends has a ______character.

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text Sometimes good,(1. FRIEND)________ neighbors are hard to come by. When you do have a kind, good neighbor nearby, it (2. REAL) ________goes a long way. So what (3.ACTUAL)________makes

a

good

neighbor

and

how

can

we

be

the

(4.GOOD)_________neighbor? Here is a good way we can be great to those we live around.

Be considerate. Notice the time of day and what others might be going through. Noise levels can be huge issue with neighbors (5. SPECIAL________ late at night. Does the family next to you have small children that go to bed early? Then don’t blast your music super loud with the windows open at 11:00 p.m. Is there an (6.OLD)________person who has a hard time getting around? Bring their mail up to their house on days with poor weather. Let’s try to be the best neighbor. It will make life much more (7. PLEASE)________for everyone!

D. VERB FORMS I. Give the correct form of verbs in the blank.

1. Hoa always (help) her parents on their farm in her free time.

2. Our summer vacation (start) in June and (last) for almost three months.

3. What do you like (do) during your vacation?

4. It’s ten to seven. Hurry up or you (be) late for work.

5. We (go) swimming every afternoon.

6. Hoa (have) breakfast with her uncle now.

7. He (not come) to the party tomorrow night.

8. They (talk) about Hoa’s work at the moment.

II. Put the verbs into the correct tense form.

1. I _________ (have) a great rime in Hoi An at present 2. There _________ (be) always a lot of traffic, day and night.

3. My friend, Michelle, and I _______ (spend) five days in Hoi An last year.

4. Outside the sun __________ (shine) so I’m off to get some fresh air.

58

5. We usually ___________ (stay) at home for a holiday, but this holiday we __________ (travel) abroad.

6. __________ (be) there any bookstores in your neighborhood?

7. My grandma ____________ (not like) living in the city.

8. How ________ (I/ get) to the railway station? - Go straight ahead then turn left.

9. Where ________ (you/ go) now? - We ________ (go) to Tan Ky House.

10._________ (be) there a post office nearby? - No. There ________ (be) no post offices near here.

III. Give the right form of "have" or "be" in the simple present tense. a. Nick (1) good-looking. He (2) tall and strong. He (3) short curly hair. He (4) a round face and brown eyes. His mouth (5) wide. b. Ann and Laura are twins. They (6) oval faces and big eyes. They (7) tall and slim. Ann (8) long black hair, but Laura (9) short curly hair. Ann has full lips, but Laura's lips (10) thin.

IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of do or play.

1. Do you often exercises?

2. My Dad football for the town team when he was young.

3. My sister enjoys______ exercises table tennis in her free time.

4. My brother basketball for the school team.

5. We gymnastics at school yesterday.

6. I like tennis.

7. My friend judo twice a week.

8. My mother yoga at the new sports centre.

F. READING ). Then correct the false I. Read the passage carefully. True or False? Check ( sentences and write them in your exercise book.

A new shopping mall is opening in Nam’s neighborhood today. It is very different from the present shopping area. All the shops are under one roof. That will be very convenient, especially during the hot and humid summer months. Customers will shop in comfort and won’t notice the weather.

Some people in the neighborhood, however, are not happy about the changes. The owners of the small stores on Tran Phu Street think the mall will take their business. Some of the

59

goods in the new stores will be the same as the ones in the small shops, but the stores in the mall will offer a wider selection of products, some at cheaper prices.

The residents and store owners have been concerned about the new mall for a few months.

They have organized a community meeting in order to discuss the situation.

T F 1. The mall is open six days a week.

2. There are more than 50 stores in the mall.

3. Everyone in the neighborhood is pleased with the new mall.

4. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in the present shopping area.

5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu Street may have to close.

II. Read and complete the text with available words. jobs historical center education universities modern capital landscapes I live in a large city in the (1) ___________ of Columbia. It is called Santa Fe de Bogota and is the (2) ___________ of Columbia. It is a large and populous city. The city is surrounded by high mountains, rivers, and amazing (3) ___________.

The city centre is expensive and noisy. It is also dangerous at night People are always running and rushing for their (4) ___________, schools and other work. Traffic is awful too.

Therefore I do not like this area too much. My city also has many great (5) ___________, as well as some important libraries. Many people travel to this city for its growing (6) ___________.

In addition, there are about 160 shopping malls. Some most famous malls are: Centro Andino, Santafé and Centro Mayor. If you like quiet space, you can visit the (7) ___________ area. There are interesting places that are full of history and culture such as La Casa de la Moneda, the elegant and big Colon Theater. If you prefer (8) ___________ places, you can go and drink a cup of coffee at the modern Hard Rock Café in Atlantis Plaza mall.

III. Read the text in exercise II again and answer the questions.

1. In what country does Santa Fe de Bogota belong to? …………………………………………………………………………………….

2. What is the city surrounded by? …………………………………………………………………………………….

3. What’s the city centre like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

4. What are people always running for? …………………………………………………………………………………….

5. What is the education in the city like? …………………………………………………………………………………….

6. How many shopping malls are there?

60

…………………………………………………………………………………….

IV. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered blank.

Does your neighbor have an (1) ______lawn, shutters with peeling paint, or siding that needs (2) ______.power washed? You might assume that they’re (3) ______, but there might be a bigger problem that you’re not aware (4) ______ The family may be dealing with (5) ______, or their lawnmower broke down and they can’t afford a new one. Offer to help with whatever the problem is in a (6) ______, non condemning manner. Perhaps you can move their lawn (7) ______them or offer your power sprayer if they don’t have one. This lets them know you care about the (8) ______of the neighborhood, and you’re on their side.

If they get upset about your kindness, that becomes their problem, not yours.

1. A. overgrow B. overgrows C. overgrew D. overgrown 2. A. to be B. be C. being D. been 3. A. neglect B. neglectful C. neglectfully D. neglecting 4. A. at B. in C. of D. with 5. A. sick B. sickness C. sickly D. sicken 6. A. to respect B. respect C. respectful D. respectfully 7. A. at B. from C. under D. for 8. A. appear B. appearance C. disappear D. disappearance G. WRITING I. Write the comparative sentences using the cues.

Ex: My house/ small/ her house →My house is smaller than her house.

1. Lan/tall/Hoa ....................................................................................................................... ……..

2. This book/ thick/ that book ....................................................................................................................... …….

3. The chair/ short/ the table ....................................................................................................................... …….

4. These boxes/ big/ those boxes ....................................................................................................................... ……..

5. Miss Trang/ young/ her sister ....................................................................................................................... …….

6. These buildings/ high/ those buildings ....................................................................................................................... …….

7. The boys/ strong/ the girls ....................................................................................................................... ……..

8. I/ old/ my brother. ....................................................................................................................... ……..

61

II. Rearrange the words and phrases to make meaningful sentences.

1. an/ pagoda/ village/ go/ old/ my/ has. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

2. railway-station/ not/ small/ a/ that/ town/ has/ got. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

3. one/ Mr. and Mrs. Brown/ only/ have/ car/ got. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

4.building/ school/new/ has got/ my/ a. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

5. many/ got/ city/ lakes/ that/ has/ beautiful. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

6.London/ parks/ has/ famous/ got/ many. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

7.any/ city/ museums/ your/ has/ got? ……………………………………………………………………………………….

8.art galleries/ not/town/ has/ got/ this/ any. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

9. buildings/ old/ got/ Hue/ pagodas/ and/ many/ has. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

10.a/ house/has/ got/ garage/ your? ……………………………………………………………………………………….

III. Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets. Do not change the meaning of the sentences and do not change the form of the words given.

Example: Tom is taller than Mary. (SHORT) Mary is shorter than Tom. 1. The Central Post Office is bigger than this District Post office. (SMALL) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

2.The skyscraper is higher than our office building. (LOW) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

3.My neighbourhood is noisier than your neighbourhood. (QUIET) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

4.Alice is slimmer than Daisy. (FAT) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

5.The Riverview Hotel is cheaper than the Palace Hotel. (EXPENSIVE) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

6. A house in the city is more expensive than a house in the country. (CHEAP) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

7.The air in the city is more polluted than the air in the country. (FRESH) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

8. Life in the city is more interesting than life in a small village. (BORING) ……………………………………………………………………………………….

62

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) describing the place where you are living or a quiet countryside. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ===================================================

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. B 11.A 21.C 31.A 41.B 2. A 12.C 22.B 32.C 42.C 3. B 13.A 23.C 33.A 43.D 4. A 14.A 24.A 34.A 44.A 5. D 15.D 25.C 35.A 45.B 6. C 16.B 26.C 36.D 46.C

63

7. C 17.D 27.A 37.A 47.D 8. D 18.C 28.C 38.B 48.B 9. B 19.B 29.A 39.A 49.A 10. A 20.A 30.C 40.B 50.C II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.A 4.D 7.D 10.C 13.D 2.C 5.C 8.C 11.C 14.B 3.B 6.B 9.A 12.A 15.B B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.C 11.A 21.A 31.B 41.A 2.D 12.B 22.D 32.A 42.C 3.B 13.B 23.C 33.D 43.D 4.C 14.A 24.A 34.D 44.C 5.D 15.B 25.C 35.A 45.A 6.C 16.A 26.D 36.A 46.B 7.B 17.D 27.C 37.B 47.A 8.A 18.B 28.A 38.C 48.C 9.D 19.B 29.B 39.C 49.D 10.C 20.A 30.B 40.B 50.B

C. WORD FORM I. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following sentences 1. convenience

6. memorial

11. famous

16. famous

2. Crowded

7. Modernize

12. conveniently

17.neighbors

3. Exciting

8. Peaceful

13. polluted

18.lovely

4. Historic

9. Pollution

14. peacefulness

19.Unluckily

64

5. Incredible

10. Quietly

15. dangerous

20.different

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text 1. friendly

2. really

3. actually

5. especially

6. elderly

7. pleasant

D. VERB FORMS I. Give the correct form of verbs in the blank.

1. helps 2. starts – lasts 3. to do/ doing 5. go 6. is having 7. won’t come II. Put the verbs into the correct tense form.

1. am having 2. is 3. spent

4. best

4. will be 8. are talking

4. is shining

5. stay - are travelling 6. Are 7. doesn’t like 8. do I get 9. are you going - 10. Is - are are going III. Give the right form of "have" or "be" in the simple present tense.

1. is 2. is 3. has 4. has 5. is 6. have 7. are 8. has 9. .has 10. are IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of do or play.

1. do 2. played 3. playing 4.plays 5. do 6. playing 7. does 8. does E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting.

1.C 6.B 11.A 16.B 21.D 2.C 7.C 12.C 17.C 22.D 3.B 8.C 13.C 18.A 23.A 4.C 5.C

9.B 10.A

14.B 15.D

19.A 20.B

24.A 25.C

26.A 27.C 28.C 29.D 30.B

F. READING I. Read the passage carefully. True or False? Check ( ). Then correct the false sentences and write them in your exercise book.

T F 1. The mall is open six days a week. ( )

65

-» The mall is open seven days a week 2. There are more than 50 stores in the mall.

-» There are 50 stores in the mall.

( )

3. Everyone in the neighborhood is pleased with the new mall. ( ) -» Not everyone is pleased with the mall.

4. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in ( ) the present shopping area.

5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu Street may have to ( ) close.

II. Read and complete the text with available words.

1. center 2. capital 3. landscapes 4. jobs 5. universities 6. education 7.historical 8.modern III. Read the text in exercise II again and answer the questions.

1. Columbia 2. It is surrounded by high mountains, rivers, and amazing landscapes.

3. It is expensive and noisy, and dangerous at night.

4. They are always running for their jobs, schools and other work.

5. It is growing.

6. There are about 160 shopping malls.

IV. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered blank.

1. D 2.A 3.B 4.C 5. B 6.C 7.D 8. B G. WRITING I. Write the comparative sentences using the cues.

1. Lan is taller than Hoa. 2. This book is thicker than that book.

3. The chair is shorter than the table.

4. These boxes are bigger than those boxes.

5. Miss Trang is younger than her sister.

6. These buildings are higher than those buildings.

7. The boys are stronger than the girls.

8. I am older than my brother.

II. Rearrange the words and phrases to make meaningful sentences.

1. My village has an old pagoda.

2. That small town has not got a railway-station.

3. Mr. and Mrs. Brown have got only one car.

4. My school has got a new building.

5. That city has got many beautiful lakes.

66

6. London has got many famous parks.

7. Has your city got any museums?

8. This town has not got any art galleries.

9. Hue has got many old buildings and pagodas.

10. Has your house got a garage?

III. Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets. Do not change the meaning of the sentences and do not change the form of the words given.

1. This District Post Office is smaller than the Central Post Office.

2. Our office building is lower than the skyscraper.

3. Your neighbourhood is quieter than my neighbourhood.

4. Daisy is fatter than Alice.

5. The Palace Hotel is more expensive than the Riverview Hotel.

6. A house in the country is cheaper than a house in the city.

7. The air in the country is fresher than the air in the city.

8. Life in a small village is more boring than life in the city.

UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. full B. must C. under D. uncle 2. A. seat B. meal C. seal D. great 3. A. hike B. life C. lit D. light B. hate C. great D. feast 4. A. gate 5. A. tin B. sin C. hide D. Jim 6. A. book B. foot C. poor D. look 7. A. solder B. story C. folk D. folder 8. A. tale B. hang C. land D. hand 9. A. slang B. danger C. fang D. sang 10. A. watched B. booked C. stopped D. worried 11. A. forest B. wonder C. rock D. lost 12. A. cave B. bay C. valley D. lake 13. A. boots B. scissors C. caves D. mountains 14. A. diverse B. island C. scissors D. right 15. A. beach B. cheese C. change D. chemistry 16. A. matches B. parades C. decides D. relatives 17. A. clothing B. hold C. poster D. dove 18. A. comb B. climb C. suburb D. bomb 19. A. although B. thinking C. gather D. other 20. A. headline B. heating C. meal D. leave 67

B. tent B. bag B. plaster B. area B. cost B. ten B. stamps B. plan B. cost B. writes B. reading B. children B. city B. speaking B. palace B. decorate B. generous B. speak

21. A. red 22. A. lake 23. A. island 24. A. map 25. A. post 26. A. top 27. A. stand 28. A. hat 29. A. coast 30. A. makes 31. A. eating 32. A. school 33. A. exciting 34. A. teaching 35. A. end 36. A. tradition 37. A. gathering 38. A. spring 39. A. truck 40. A. policeman 41. A. dangerous

B. unload B. sign B. travel

C. end C. take C. cost C. hat C. question C. tomato C. steal C. area C. island C. takes C. teaching C. cheek C. bicycle C. wearing C. central C. make C. guest C. should C. turn

C. bike C. man

D. forest D. nature D. longest D. plan D. coast D. future D. sure D. map D. dust D. drives D. breakfast D. chubby D. circle D. meaning D. send D. April D. great D. summer

D. lunch D. spider D. traffic

A. stay B. vacation C. language D. waste 43. A. photo B. hotel C. badminton D. homework 44. A. population B. bus C. uncle D. summer 45. A. read B. teach C. head D. eat 46. A. school B. child C. chair D. watch 47. A. books B. pens C. chairs D. lives 48. A. cable B. station C. answer D. latest 49. A. kitchen B. catch C. chemistry D. armchair 50. A. helped B. wanted C. sounded D. suggested II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. backyard B. remote C. Korean D. desert 2. A. degree B. forest C. plaster D. wonder 3. A. suburb B. remote C. station D. temple 4. A. organize B. zodiac C. essential D. waterfall 5. A. museum B. windsurfing C. historic D. pagoda 6. A. thrilling B. surround C. travel D. island 7. A. valley B. modern C. quiet D. cuisine 8. A. diverse B. mountain C. empty D. racing 9. A. appearance B. waterfall C. cathedral D. essential 42.

68

10. A. gallery 11. A. desert 12. A. natural 13. A. experience 14. A. around 15. A. animal

B. serious

C. memorial

D. barbecue

B. picture C. mountain D. river B. painkiller C. important D. waterfall B. necessary C. forgettable D. traditional B. begin C. diverse D. summer B. attraction C. essential D. umbrella

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Ha Long Bay is famous __________ its scenic rock formations.

A. to B. with C. for D. by 2. Titov island in Ha Long Bay was named __________ a Russian cosmonaut, GhermannTitov.

A. for B. with C. after D. by 3. You __________ look at other students’ work. It’s against the rules.

A. must B. should C. shouldn’t D. mustn’t 4. The Sahara is the third largest __________ in the world.

A. island B. desert C. valley D. mountain 5. When hiking overnight, don’t forget to bring the __________. It will keep you warm at night.

A. sleeping bag B. hiking boots C. sun cream D. painkillers 6. The Amazon River is __________ river in the world.

A. the wider B. wider than C. the widest D. widest 7. __________ is the coldest place in Vietnam?

A. Who B. What C. Which D. When 8. Peter must __________ this essay today. He’s going out tomorrow.

A. finish B. finishes C. finishing D. to finish 9. Which is __________, the West Lake or the Sword Lake?

A. large B. larger C. largest D. the largest 10.The Grand Canyon is one of the natural __________ of the world.

A. materials B. sights C. scenery D. wonders 11. The weather is very hot in______. You can see camels and rattlesnakes easily there.

A. valley B. ocean C. desert D. mountain 12. Cam Ly______in Lam Dong Province attracts many tourists to visit each year.

A. Island B.Waterfall C. Highland D. Forest 13. My sister had a headache yesterday when she returned from her camping. My mother gave her some______to reduce it.

A. painkillers B. plaster C.sun cream D. cool water 14. My brother and I wear______to move conveniently when we go hiking in the mountain.

A. walking boots B. scissors C. backpacks D. waterproof coat 15. We brought a______to look around when we move in the jungle in the dark.

A. tent B. mobile phone C. sun hat D. torch 16. I had an occasion to come to visit Ngu Hanh Son. It's a mountain______in Da Nang.

69

A. land B. range C.mount D. rock 17. Those islands in Nha Trang are named______some interesting animals such as monkeys or swiftest.

A. around B. in C. after D. by 18. It is______to check your luggage carefully when you travel somewhere by plane.

A. unusual B.attractive C. essential D. exciting 19. Ba Be Lake in Bac Kan is______natural lake in Viet Nam. A. the largest B.the large C. largest D.more large 20. Many people say that Nile is______river in the world.

A. the deepest B. deeper C. the longest D. longer 21. I think Nam is one of______tour guides in this company.

A. the best B.the better C. best D. better 22. What is __ mountain in Viet Nam? -1 think it's Fansipan.

A. the height B.the highest C. the higher D. highest 23. We ____ _____ get up early to be at the campsite in time.

A. can B. must C. can't D. mustn't 24. You______throw the rubbish into the West Lake.

A. may B. must C. mustn't D. may not 25. We ______ hold a party tonight but we ______make some loud noises affecting our neighbours.

A. must/ mustn't B. mustn't/ must C. can/ must D. can/ mustn't 26. "Do you finish packing"? – "Yes. All my things are in my ______" A. back B. backpack C. back pack D. plaster 27.Ha Long Bay is Vietnam's_______ wonder.

A. most beautiful natural B. most natural beautiful C. the most beautiful natural D. the most natural beautiful 28.The Amazon .

A. Rain forest B. Rainy Forest C. Wet Forest D. Wetter Forest 29._______is a large thick bag for sleeping in, especially when you are camping.

A.A sleeping bag B.A sleep bag C. A sleepy bag D.A bag for sleeping 30. If we had a_______, we wouldn't get los.

A. backpack B. ruler C. compass D. pain killer 31. You_______ travel alone to the mountain. Always go in a group.

A. must B. mustn't C. do D. don't 32. People think Ayers Rock is_______ in the evening when it is red.

A. good B. better C. best D. the best 33. You_____ take a lot of warm clothes when you go to Sa Pa in winter A. must B. mustn't C. can D. can't 34. Ba Be Lake is the largest_______ lake in Viet Nam. A. fresh B. freshwater C. water D. mount 35. The Imperial City in Hue is the greatest_____.

70

A. tourist attraction B. tourist attractions C. tour attraction D. attraction tourist 36. Ha Long Bay is the number one______ in Viet Nam. A. nature wonder B. natural wonder C. wonderful nature D. wonder nature 37. You_____ be late for school. It's against the school regulations.

A. must B. mustn't C. can D. can't 38. You_______ all necessary things along with you before you start your trip.

A. takes B. won't take C. must take D. mustn't take 39. The boat trip to Ca Mau, the southern tip of Viet Nam, was____ experience of my life.

A. good B. better C. best D. the best 40.You must remember to bring a_______- it's very useful when you go into a cave because it's very dark there.

A. scissors B. torch C. clock D. compass 41.He works _____we do.

A. harder B. as hard as C. harder D. so hard as 42.No one in this class is_______ Jimmy.

A. so tall as B. tall than C. the tallest D. more tall than 43.Apples are usually_______ oranges.

A. cheap than B. more cheap C. the cheapest D. cheaper than 44.I know him _______than you do.

A. better B. more well C. good D. the best 45.Marie is not _______intelligent________ her sister.

A. more/as B. so/so C. so/as D. the/of 46.The Sears Tower is_______ building in Chicago.

A. taller B. the more tall C. the tallest D. taller and taller 47.Your bike is 3 times _____.

A. as fastly as mine B. as fast as me C. as fast as mine D. faster than mine 48.The fatter I become, the _______ I run.

A. quicker B. more slowly C. slower D. more fast 49.He learns English_______ than we do.

A. badly B. badlier C. more badly D. worse 50.Their house is________ beautiful than mine.

A. as B. more C. much D. so D. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. A trip to Fan Si Pan is an ________experience.

(FORGET)

2. You can watch (tradition) ________when you visit Sa Pa.

(TRADITION)

71

3. Many visitors think that the greatest ________in Hue is temples.

(ATTRACT)

4.You must take an umbrella because it's ________in Mui Ne at this

(RAIN)

time of year.

5. Hue is near Da Nang, but it's more ________than Da Nang.

(INTEREST)

6. The Perfume River is the most ________river in Central Viet Nam. (FAME) 7. You can join many exciting ________during the festival.

(ACT)

8. A butterfly is more ________than a moth.

(COLOUR)

9. Nam's brother is a ________. He took that picture.

(PHOTOGRAPH)

10. Excuse me. I'd like some ________about the cruise.

(INFORM)

11. I find the enormous _____of life on earth quite

(DIVERSE)

overwhelming.

12. The books on this list are ______reading for the course.

(ESSENCE)

13. The book is a ______adventure story.

(THRILL)

14. We are looking for exponential growth in our _______

(INVEST)

15. All that gossip about Linda is just pure_______

(INVENT)

16. Children are allowed much more______these days.

(FREE)

17. He’s been ______for the past six months

(JOB)

18. A group of _______people set up camp in the field.

(TRAVEL)

19. The Great Wall of China is the world’s ________ structure.

(LONG)

20. Is Quang Ninh a ________________ province?

(MOUNTAIN)

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text Most visitors view the canyon from South Rim (1. VIEW)_____stations. Considering that it has taken the Colorado River the past 17 million years to carve this wonder out of rock, it seems only fair to take a (2. CLOSE)________look. Built by the National Park Service in 1924, the South Kaibab Trail takes you to the (3.WONDER)_______named “Ooh Ah Point”, and, for the (4. ADVENTURE)_______, further into the canyon’s (5.DEEP)_______.Plan (6. CARE)_______heat stroke is no fun.

72

In the northwest corner of Arizona,(7. VISIT)________usually head to South Rim Village (120 kilometers northwest of Flagstaff on route 180) or the North Rim Village. Free shuttle buses service the South Rim in summer months. Ranger-led day hikes and walks take place throughout the year.

E. CORRECTION I. Find the mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence and correct it.

1. The Great Wall of China is the world’s longer structure.

A B C D 2. Traveling by tram is most convenient than traveling by car in this city.

A B C D 3. You must taking off your shoes before entering this room.

A B C D 4. Do you think there is another mountain highest than Mount Everest?

A B C D 5. Ha Long Bay is the more beautiful natural wonder of Viet Nam. A B C D 6. The scenery of the Amazon rainforest in your pictures looks incredibly.

A B C D 7. In my opinion, foreign tourists visit Hoi An just to its ancient houses.

A B C D 8. Missouri is longer river in the USA, but it is shorter than the Amazon.

A B C D 9. Meghalaya in India has more rainy or wettest weather in the world.

A B C D 10. Lang Son is one of the coldest province in North Viet Nam. A B C D 11. You mustn’t cheat in exams because the teacher will punish you when you do that.

A B C D 12. I’m so worried because I mustn’t be at home after school right now.

A B C D 13. It is more interesting book I have ever read.

A B C D 14. What’s the better film you have ever seen?

A B C D 15. You mustn’t look after the house when your parents are away A B C D 16. It is raining heavily outside. You shouldn't bring your raincoat.

A B C D 73

17. She always give presents to her parents on Tet holiday.

A B C D 18. She will helps her mother decorate the house before Tet. A B C D 19. I don't think that lucky money can bring us good and bad luck.

A B C D 20. The New Year Festival in Thailand is on April. It is very hot.

A B C D II. These is a mistake in each of these sentences. Underline the mistake and then correct it.

Sentence Correction 1. I’m the younger person in my family. ______________ 2. My brother is busyer than I am. _____________ ______________ 3. Mary is taller that her sister. _____________ 4. Zhang is from China. She speaks China.

5. Ha Noi have a population of 3.6 million ______________ 6. London is smallest than Mexico City. ______________ 7. She’s my friend. She’s from French. ______________ 8. Is your kitchen biger than my kitchen? _____________ 9. How height is the PETRONAS Twin Towers? ______________ ______________ 10. Which season is coldest in your country.

F. READING I. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered blank.

Like other high peaks in (1)______region, Mount Everest has long been revered by local people. Its most common Tibetan (2) ______, Chomolungma, means “Goddess Mother of the World”, (3) ______ “Goddess of the Valley”. The Sanskrit name Sagarmatha means (4) ______ “Peak of Heaven”. Its identity as the highest point on the Earth’s (5) ______was not recognized, however, until 1852, (6) ______the governmental Survey of India established that fact. (7) ______1865 the mountain-previously referred to as Peak XV- was (8) ______for Sir George Everest, British survey or general of India from 1830 to 1843.

1. A. one B. a C. an D. the 2. A. title B. name C. selection D. label 3. A. nor B. with C. or D. and 4. A. literally B. literate C. literal D. illiterate 5. A. covering B. plane C. surface D. facet 6. A. whose B. who C. why D. when

74

7. A. in B. on C. with D. between 8. A. rename B. renamed C. renaming D. to rename II. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blanks vacation island flights wild thousands center and here Just off the coast of South Korea, Jeju Island pulls in vacationers and honeymooners by the (1) ________ Even if you haven’t just gotten married, a (2) ________here sure can feel like it.

Regular direct (3) ________to and from international cities such as Tokyo, Osaka, Beijing (4) ________Shanghai (as well as South Korea’s domestic airports) and liberal visa requirements also make getting (5) ________a nap.

Jeju (6) ________features a volcanic Hallasan commanding the island from the (7) ________, a 224-kilometer semi-tropical forested national park, a (8) ________ coastline dotted with waterfalls and the longest lava tube in the world.

III. Read the following text and answer the question below.

One of the greatest attraction in Africa and one of the most spectacular waterfalls in the world, Victoria Falls is located on the Zambezi River, the fourth largest river in Africa, which is also defining the border between Zambia and Zimbabwe.

Victoria Falls is the only waterfall I the world with a length of more than a kilometer and a height of more than hundred meters. It is also considered to be the largest fall I the world.

The noise of Victoria Falls can be heard from a distance of 40 kilometers, while the spray and mist from the falling water is rising to a height of over 400 meters and can be seen from a distance of 50 kilometers. No wonder that the local tribes used to call the waterfall Mosi-o-Tunya “The smoke that thunders”.

1. Where is Victoria Falls located? ………………………………………………………………………………………

2. What is the length and the height of Victoria Falls? ………………………………………………………………………………………

3. How far can the noise of Victoria Fall be heard? ………………………………………………………………………………………

4. How far can we see the spray and mist? ………………………………………………………………………………………

5. What do the local tribes used to call Victoria Falls? ………………………………………………………………………………………

G. WRITING

75

I. Use the structure“What+(a/ an) + adj + noun!” to make exclamative sentences.

Ex: - The girl is very beautiful. →What a beautiful girl!

1. The weather is very awful. → 2. The meal is very delicious. → 3. The boy is very clever. → 4. The pictures are very colorful. → 5. The dress is very expensive. → 6. The milk is sour. → II. Write full sentences, using the suggested words and phrases given. l. Mexico City/ big/ city/ world. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

2. My brother's room/ big/ my room. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

3. London/ small/ Tokyo. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

4. Hung/ short/ Ba. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

5.Fansipan/ high mountain/ Viet Nam. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

6.Nam/ tall/ boy/ his class. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

7. Thoa/ beautiful/ girl/ village. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

8. The pagoda/ tall/ the temple. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

III. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

1. Ho Chi Minh City with the population of over 8 million is bigger than any other cities in Viet Nam. Ho Chi Minh City is the ___________________________________________________ .

2. Angel Falls is over 1,000 feet higher than any other falls in the world.

Angel Falls is ___________________________________________________________ .

3. Lake Superior in North America is a freshwater lake; it is larger than any other freshwater lakes in the world.

Lake Superior in North America is __________________________________________ .

4. Remember to bring the compass: if not we will get lost in the forest.

You must ______________________________________________________________ .

5. Take a waterproof coat during your trip to Fansipan Mountain because it is rainy there.

You __________________________________________________________________ .

6. It is very important that you arrive on time at school. ______________________________________________________________________ .

7. It is very dangerous to walk alone after 10 pm in that park.

76

You __________________________________________________________________ .

8. Taking a boat trip around the islands in Ha Long Bay is the most important thing of the trip.

You __________________________________________________________________ .

9. Antarctica is colder than any other place in the world.

Antarctica is ____________________________________________________________ .

10. It is wrong of us to write on the walls or tables in our classroom.

IV. Write a short paragraph (80-100 words) describing the place where you have ever visited. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… =================================================== ANSWER KEYS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A 11.B 21.D 31.D 41.A 2. D 12.C 22.B 32.A 42.C 3. C 13.A 23.A 33.C 43.C 4. D 14.C 24.D 34.C 44.A 5. C 15.D 25.C 35.B 45.C 6. C 16.A 26.D 36.A 46.A 7. B 17.D 27.D 37.B 47.A 8. A 18.C 28.C 38.C 48.C 9. B 19.B 29.C 39.C 49.C 10. D 20.A 30.D 40.A 50.A II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.D 4.C 7.D 10.C 13.B 77

2.A 3.B

5.A 6.B

8.A 9.C

11.A 12.C

14.D 15.A

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences 1.C 11.C 21.A 31.B 41.B 2.C 12.B 22.B 32.D 42.A 3.D 13.A 23.B 33.A 43.D 4.B 14.A 24.C 34.B 44.A 5.A 15.D 25.D 35.A 45.C 6.C 16.B 26.B 36.B 46.C 7.B 17.C 27.A 37.B 47.C 8.A 18.C 28.A 38.C 48.C 9.B 19.A 29.A 39.D 49.D 10.D 20.C 30.C 40.B 50.B C. WORD FORM I. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following sentences 1. unforgetable

6. famous

11. diversity

16. Freedom

2. traditionalism

7. activites

12. Essential

17. jobless

3. attraction

8. colourful

13. Thrilling

18. Travelling

4. rainy

9. photographer

14. Investment

19. longest

5. interesting

10. information

15. invention

20. mountainous

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

1. viewing

2. closer

3. wonderfully

5. depths

6. carefully

7. visitors

D. VERB FORMS I. Complete the sentences with must or mustn't.

1. must 2. mustn't 3. must 6. mustn’t 7 mustn’t 8. mustn’t

4. must 9. mustn’t

4. adventurous

5. must 10. must

II. Put the verbs in brackets into Present simple or Present continuous.

1. is running 2. buys 3. aren't drinking 4. are climbing 5. is crying 6. wear 7. are you 8. eat 9. set offs 10. aren't going doing 78

III. Complete the sentences with the verb+-ing.

1. doing 2. watching 4. playing 5. swimming

3. skiing 6. practising

E. CORRECTION I. Find the mistake in the four underlined parts of each sentence and correct it.

1.D 6.D 11.A 16.C 2.B 7.C 12.B 17.A 3.A 8.A 13.A 18.B 4.D 9.B 14.B 19.D 5.B 10.C 15.A 20.B II. These is a mistake in each of these sentences. Underline the mistake and then correct it.

1. younger → 2. busyer→ 3. that → 4. China → 5. have → has youngest busier than Chinese 6. smallest → 7. French → 8. biger→ 9. height→ high 10. coldest → the smaller France bigger coldest F. READING I. Read the following text and decide which answer best fits each numbered bank 1. D 2.B 3.C 4.A 5. C 6.D 7.A 8. B II. Read the following text and use the words given in the box to fill in the blank 1. thousands 2. Vacation 3. Flights 4. And 5. here 6. Island 7. Center 8. Wild III. Read the following text and answer the questions below 1. It is located on the Zambezi River.

2. It is more than a kilometer long and more than hundred meters high.

3. It can be heard from a distance of 40 kilometers.

4. It can be seen from a distance of 50 kilometers.

5. They call it Mosi-o-Tunya “The smoke that thunders”.

G. WRITING I. Use the structure“What+(a/ an) + adj + noun!” to make exclamative sentences.

1. What awful weather!

2. What delicious meal!

3. What a clever boy!

4. What colorful pictures!

79

5. What an expensive dress!

6. What sour milk!

II. Write full sentences, using the suggested words and phrases given.

1. Mexico City is the biggest city in the world.

2. My brother’s room is bigger than my room.

3. London is smaller than Tokyo.

4. Hung is shorter than Ba. 5. Fansipan is the highest mountain in Viet Nam. 6. Nam is the tallest boy in his class.

7. Thoa is the most beautiful girl in the village.

8. The pagoda is taller than the temple.

III. Rewrite the following sentences, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.

1. Ho Chi Minh City is the biggest city in Viet Nam. 2. Angel Falls is the highest fall in the world.

3. Lake Superior in North America is the largest freshwater lake in the world.

4. You must bring the compass; if not we will get lost in the forest.

5. You must take a waterproof coat during your trip to Fansipan Mountain because it is rainy there.

6. You must arrive on time at school.

7. You mustn’t walk alone after 10 pm in that park.

8. You must take a boat trip around the islands in Ha Long Bay. 9. Antarctica is the coldest place in the world.

10. We mustn’t write on the walls or tables in our classroom.

80

UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY 1. A. student 2. A. summer 3. A. sure 4. A. ocean 5. A. ache 6. A. cover 7. A. same 8. A. stripe 9. A. Russia 10. A. fix 11. A. decorate 12. A. shopping 13. A. centre 14. A. present 15. A. blossom 16. A. should 17. A. shout 18. A. sure 19. A. peach 20. A. celebrate 21. A. historic 22. A. calendar 23. A. wonder 24. A. beach 25. A. clothes 26. A. picture 27. A. bookcase 28. A. thought 29. A. food 30. A. discuss 31. A. special 32. A. cheer 33. A. tradition 34. A. blossom 35. A. rice 36. A. decorate 37. A. smile 38. A. travel 39. A. love 40. A. lucky 81

B. sugar B. singer B. stupid B. ceiling B. school B. pencil B. see B. science B. class B. exam B. calendar B. sugar B. special B. sound B. chess B. around B. flower B. shout B. sweets B. cousin B. exciting B. celebrate B. compass B. teach B. fireworks B. question B. tablet B. without B. good B. success B. spring B. child B. condition B. discussion B. celebrate B. market B. so B. parent B. pagoda B. shy

C. stainless C. study C. spring C. city C. machine C. place C. sister C. usually C. glass C. six C. celebrate C. sure C. decide C. sweet C. messy C. house C. bow C. sing C. eat C. city C. island C. decorate C. brother C. feather C. scissors C. furniture C. behave C. theatre C. took C. possess C. she C. peach C. celebration C. rooster C. calendar C. resolution C. spring C. hand C. mother C. why

D. slang D. tables D. snail D. circle D. chemical D. police D. sure D. stop D. pass D. next D. clean D. summer D. rice D. season D. passion D. sound D. throw D. wish D. feather D. cinema D. firework D. school D. forest D. peaceful D. mountains D. celebration D. game D. tooth D. cooking D. classroom D. sugar D. chorus D. question D. compass D. smile D. celebrate D. noise D. bad D. come D. buy

B. wish C. fish D. high 41. A. big 42. A. pagoda B. torch C. overseas D. sofa B. messy C. decorate D. department 43. A. temple 44. A. museum B. windsurfing C. surround D. diverse 45. A. thrilling B. then C. through D. thread B. chopsticks C. pictures D. pillows 46. A. tables 47. A. cupboards B. windows C. tourists D. posters 48. A. dishes B. vases C. plates D. fridges B. hotels C. laptops D. fireworks 49. A. toilets 50. A. televisions B. bookshelves C. wardrobes D. parents II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. active B. crazy C. remote D. crowded 2. A. repeat B. rubbish C. money D. feather 3. A. forest B. lucky C. empty D. deny 4. A. apricot B. first-footer C. calendar D. decorate 5. A. pagoda B. fantastic C. cathedral D. family 6. A. sofa B. cupboard C. delay D. compass 7. A. define B. wardrobe C. boring D. crowded 8. A. desert B. delete C. station D. modern 9. A. celebrate B. creative C. remember D. apartment 10. A. generous B. gallery C. celebrate D. pagoda 11. A. flower B. travel C. lucky D. behave 12. A. firework B. believe C. money D. Pretty 13. A. decorate B. celebrate C. example D. furniture 14. A. activity B. envelope C. colourful D. poverty 15. A. pagoda B. February C. calendar D. relative B. MULTIPLE CHOICE Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. On New Year's Day, children in Korea make a ____to their parents or elders and wish them a long and healthy_____.

A.bow - live B. friend - lives C. bows - lives D.bow - life 2. I wish you a____ life and ____ health.

A. long - best B. big - good C. long - good D. happy - bad 3. We should help our mothers____ the table after the meal.

A. make B. to make C. clear D. to clearing 4. I will ______my lucky money in my piggy bank.

82

A. keep B. spend C. borrow D. give 5. At Tet, many people present rice to wish_____ enough food throughout the year.

A. in B. at C. for D. with 6. We shouldn't play music_______ after midnight.

A. careful B. right C. loud D. easy 7. Some Vietnamese people don't eat shrimps_____ New Year's Day. A. in B. on C. at D. during 8. The Times Square Ball begins its fall_____ millions of voices countdown the final seconds of the year.

A. when B. during C. throughout D. because 9. Children should help their parents____ their house ____ flowers and pictures.

A. repaint - with B. make - more beautiful C. decorate-in D. decorate - with 10. New Year's Eve is a night when members of a family often get .

A. together B. another C. other D. others st 11. January 1 is a day when people in Europe and America_____ New Year.

A. see B. remember C. celebrate D. spend 12. On New Year's Day, children lucky money red envelope.

A. get - in B. ask - on C. take - at D. have - with 13. In London people cheer and sing when the clock____ midnight on New Year's Eve. A. gets B. strikes C. see D. goes 14. People believe that ____water over people will _____ a lot of rain in the New Year.

A. throw - bring B. throwing - bring C. to throw - bringing D. throwing - bringing 15.On New Year's Day, many people put on their best clothes and go to____ or visit their.

A. houses - friends B. pagodas - relatives C. pagoda - relative D. the main room – friend 16.Hoa doesn’t have _______ friends in Ha Noi. A. much B. lots C. a lot D. any 17.How __________is it from your house to school?

A. often B. many C. far D. distance 18.How old will you ________ on your next birthday?

A. be B. are C. am D. is 19.What .________lovely living room!

A. a B. an C. the D. 20.The apartment at number 79 is .________ of the three ones.

A. good B. the best C. best D. better 21.American students take part ._______. different activities at recess.

A. at B. on C. to D. in 22..________ do you study in the library after school? - Once a week.

A. How often B. How far C. How many D. How long 23.Many young people enjoy _______ community service.

83

A. do B. to do C. doing D. does 24.________ is your telephone number?

A. When B. Which C. What D. How 25.Her birthday is __________ Friday, August 20th.

A. at B. on C. in D. of 26._______you have a test tomorrow morning?

A. Will B. Do C. Are D. does 27.She will have a party ._______her birthday.

A. for B. on C. in D. to 28.What’s your ________?

A. birthday B. day of birth C. date of birth D. birth of day 29.Will he be free? - .________ A. No, he won’t B. No, he doesn’t C. No, he isn’t D. No, he will 30.We will_________ our old friends next Sunday.

A. to meet B. meet C. meeting D. meets 31.________ you like a cup of tea?

A. Would B. Will C. What D. does 32. He looks different ________ his father.

A. at B. with C. from D. to 33. Students have two _______ each day.

A. 20 - minutes breaks C. 20 - minute breaks B. 20 - minute break D. 20 minutes break 34.The United States’ Library of Congress is one of the .________ libraries in the world.

A. larger B. largest C. larger than D. large 35._________ novels are very interesting.

A. These B. This C. That D. It 36.Vietnamese people usually return to their families _________ Tet. A. in B. on C. for D. during 37.When the clock strikes midnight, colorful fireworks light _________ the sky.

A. in B. up C. on D. over 38.You shouldn’t_________ things on the first day of Tet. A. make B. hang C. break D. cook 39. Tet is the _________ time of the year.

A. busy B. busier C. busiest D. most busy 40. Tet is the biggest and most important_________ in Vietnam.

A. festival B. decoration C. occasion D. tradition 41. Tet is coming. We _________ clean and decorate our house.

A. should B. shouldn’t C. mustn’t D. are 42. I always _________ my grandparents a long life and good health.

A. celebrate B. wish C. make D. bring 43. The _________ is the first person to enter your house in the New Year.

84

A. relative B. first cousin C. first footer D. rooster 44. ‘_________ do Vietnamese people prepare for Tet?’‘They decorate their houses and cook special food.’

A. What B. Where C. How D. How often 45.‘In which country do people throw water at one another?’‘_________’ A. Scotland B. Thailand C. The USA D. Denmark 46. Giving red envelopes containing lucky money to children is wishing_____good health.

A. to B. for C. from D. away 47. We will_____ red fruits and rice on the altar to wish a happy year during Tet. A. cheer B. pray C. welcome D. present 48. Some people often decorate their houses with red flowers and balloons because they believe that this colour will bring_____ to them during the year.

A. poverty B. richness C. luck D. gold 49. Some people avoid eating____ at Tet because they think it won't bring success to them.

A. pot B. green beans C. eggs D. shrimps 50. My mother and I to the flower market to buy a kumquat tree and some apricot flowers because Tet is coming soon.

A. are going B. will go C. went D. go D. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. I always go to the pagoda and visit my

______during

Tet (RELATION)

holiday.

2. Tet is a special occasion for family_____. Every family member (GATHER) enjoys themselves together during that time.

3. We made a lot of Banh Chung and cleaned the house to _____ Tet.

(CELEBRATION)

4.______, children will receive lucky money from adults during Tet

(TRADITION)

holiday.

5. During Tet, we go to the pagoda to pray for good health,____ and

(HAPPY)

wealth.

6. We shouldn’t eat a lot of sweets because we can have a _____ or (TOOTH) astomach ache during Tet.

7. It's so____ to have a spring vacation in Sa Pa.

(FANTASY)

8. There are lots of interesting _when you visit Hoi An Ancient

(ACT)

85

Town.

9. They want their local environment to maintain _____without

(NATURE)

people's bad actions.

10. Tet is a busy time for house____. People usually clean the house

(DECORATE)

and buy flowers, kumquat trees or red envelopes.

11. My father will spend an amount of time____our walls before

(REPAINT)

Tet.

12. There are many wonderful streams and waterfalls in____areas.

(MOUNTAIN)

13. When they went camping in the forest, they brought_____bags

(SLEEP)

to avoid dangerous insects.

14. I had a(n)______trip to Tra Co Beach last week. I sunbathed on

(FORGET)

the beach and swam in the sea all day.

15. Hue is one of the tourist______in Viet Nam. I'd like to visit the

(ATTRACT)

Perfume River and many ancient tombs there.

16. ____, you can find various plants and animals in Phu Quoc

(INTEREST)

Island.

17. You must be _________ when you cross the busy streets.

(CARE)

18. This is the ______ pagoda in our country.

(OLD).

19. Do you know what the ______ of the river ? .

(DEEP)

20.This tree has a lot of green_______

(LEAF)

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

In China, traditions and celebrations vary (1. GREAT)_________across the country.

In the North, Chinese dumplings are the must-eat food on Chinese New Year’s Eve, but south of the Yangtze River most people eat spring rolls or (2.STICK)________rice cake. For more on this, read How CNY Is Celebrated in Northern and Southern China.

The main traditions include eating (3.UNION)_______dinner with family, giving red envelopes, firecrackers, new clothes, and (4.DECORATE)________For full details see

86

Spring Festival (5. CELEBRATE)__________or read on for a summary of (6.

ACT)_______and guide to travel in China in this festive period.

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. My father will take a new calendar on the wall, and he'll also repaint the living A B C room before Tet. D 2. My mother will do shopping to buy some new clothes for our family, so I'm A B C D very happy now.

3. At Tet, I will receive lucky money at red envelopes after saying my nice wishes A B C D to our parents.

4. This year, we'll come back to our hometown so we must celebrate Tet A B C together with my grandparents.

D 5. There are some beliefs that people will succeed when they break things A B C D during Tet holiday.

6. Look over there! An old man can't cross the street so we would like to help A B C D him now.

7. We should buy and burn fireworks because it will be dangerous.

A B C D 8. Ho Chi Minh City is famous with its markets, museums or high buildings.

A B C D 9. I sit in front of the computer too much so I need plaster to put on my back now.

A B C D 10. I hope I will have some interesting experiences when I have a trip to Japan during A B C D Tet holiday.

11. The pagoda is much historic and larger than the other ones in this city.

A B C D 12. Some tourists say that Son Doong, Sung Sot and Dau Go are some of the greater A B C D caves in Viet Nam. 13. You mustn't take your raincoat in the heavy rain because you may get wet.

87

A B C D 14. Tomorrow, your grandpa will visit us so you should go out with your cousins to play badminton A B C D 15. I like watching TV. There are a good film on TV tonight.

A B C D 16. How many childs does your mother have ?

A B C D 17. We have Geography every Wednesdays.

A B C D 18. If you climb the mountain, you will sees a lot of flowers A B C D 19. There are five bridge across Han River in Da Nang.

A B C D 20. They are on holiday for two weeks so they will be here tomorrow.

A B C D II. Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.

Sentence Correction 1. One of my brothers have two eggs and some bread for ______________ breakfast.

2. Our teacher gives us much homework today. ______________ 3. My family is traveling to Ho ChiMinh City by a bus. ______________ ______________ 4. Most people doesn’t go to work on Sunday. ______________ 5. Our classroom is on the two floor. ______________ 6. His sister often goes to school with an orange small ba ______________ 7. Mai always helps her mother in the housework. ______________ 8. Would you like an apples or any orange juice?

9. A lot of my friends play soccer, but not much of them play ______________ tennis 10. Vy is a very good tennis play. She plays for the school team ______________ F. READING I. Read the passage and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

New Year’s Eve, 31st December, is a time for the British to eat, drink and party when they celebrate the beginning of a New Year. Many people go to Trafalgar Square in London or a street party in their city. Others visit friends or go to pubs and restaurants, which are very crowded on that night.

There is a great atmosphere when everyone waits for Big Ben to strike midnight. Then people kiss and hold hands to sing the traditional Scottish song Auld Lang Syne. Many people also light fireworks at midnight.

88

The main tradition is ‘First Footing’. This means the first person to come into your house after midnight should be a tall dark-haired man. He should bring a piece of coal, some bread, salt or a bottle of whisky to bring good luck to the family.

A lot of people also make New Year’s Resolution; they promise to do things like stop smoking or ‘do more exercise’ in the New Year. January 1st (and 2nd in Scotland) is a public holiday so their people can recover from their celebrations.

1. On New Year’s Eve everyone stays at home.

2. People sing a traditional song at midnight.

3. There are no fireworks on New Year’s Eve. 4. It is good luck for a blonde woman to be your first visitor after midnight.

5. Lots of people promise to change in the New Year.

6. New Year’s Day is a public holiday in Britain.

II. Read and choose the correct answers.

Preparation for Tet, Vietnamese New Year, starts two or three months before the actual celebrations. People try to pay off their debts in advance so that they can be debt-free on Tet. Parents buy new clothes for their children so that the children can wear them when Tet arrives. Because a lot of commercial activities will cease during the celebrations people try to stock up on supplies as much as possible.

In the days leading up to Tet, the streets and market are full of people. Everyone is busy buying food, clothes, and decorating for their house. Each family prepares some special foods for the holiday. Those who live far away from home will try to come home to celebrate Tet with their family. Vietnamese families usually have a family altar to pay respect to their ancestors. During Tet the altar is thoroughly cleaned and new offerings are placed there.

On New Year’s Eve, each home is thoroughly cleaned and decorated with flowers and offerings for ancestors by the night before Tet. Many people stay up until midnight to welcome the New Year or go to the pagoda to pray for luck, prosperity, and happiness.

In the morning, actual Tet celebrations begin. The first day of Tet is reserved for the nuclear family. In big cities, the streets are usually empty as most people stay at home or leave the city to visit their close relatives in the countryside. Usually, children dress their new clothes and give their elders the traditional Tet greetings before receiving the lucky money.

1. This passage is about ________.

A. New Year’s Eve C. the first day of the New Year C. preparation for Tet and Tet holiday D. paying debt before Tet 2. Vietnamese children ________.

A.have to pay off debt before Tet B.should not receive any money during Tet C. are not allowed to wear new clothes at Tet D.receive lucky money from adults during Tet 3. Which is NOT mentioned as a preparation for Tet? A. visiting friends and relatives B. cooking special foods 89

C.decorating houses D. paying off debts 4. Which is NOT referred during Tet celebration?

A. going to the pagoda B. the increasing of commercial activities C.visiting relatives D. wearing new clothes 5. Vietnamese families ________.

A.do not celebrate Tet if they are poor B.only celebrate Tet when they are wealthy C. have an altar to worship then ancestors D.gather in the streets on the first day of Tet III. Read the following text and answer the questions below ACTIVITIES OF SEOLLAL There will be special operations for the visitors who want to make special memories at Hangang River during the holiday. After watching a romantic acoustic guitar performance on board, they can fly kites and experience the “Winter Story Cruise” that deserves to be enjoyed.

When visiting Hangang Park during the Korean new Year’s holiday, anyone can enjoy the traditional experiences and games for free. In the 11 areas Hangang Park, visitors can enjoy various traditional games including Yutnori, Neolttwigi, etc.

From January 27th to January 30th , “the 2017 Seollal Feast at Unhyeongung Palace” will be held in the Unhyeongung Palace, aiming to greet New Year’s day, Seollal which, is one of the most special holidays for Korean people, and to pray for the wellbeing of all the citizens throughout the year.

1. What can people do after watching a guitar performance on board? ………………………………………………………………………………………

2. What can people enjoy when visiting Hangang Park during the Korean New year’s holiday? ………………………………………………………………………………………

3. Where can visitors enjoy various traditional games? ………………………………………………………………………………………

4. What traditional games are available in the 11 areas of Hangang Park? ………………………………………………………………………………………

5. What is the purpose of celebrating 2017 Seollal Feast? ……………………………………………………………………………………

F. WRITING I. Use “should + verb” to make the sentences.

Ex: I have a stomachache. (go to the doctor) →You should go to the doctor.

1. I feel very tired. (take a short rest) 90

............................................................................................................................

2. Hoa has a bad cold. (stay in bed) ............................................................................................................................

3. Minh’s room is very dirty, (clean it every day) ............................................................................................................................

4. We’ll have an English test tomorrow. (learn your lessons carefully) ............................................................................................................................

5. Nga has a headache. (take an aspirin) ............................................................................................................................

6. My teeth aren’t strong and white. (brush them regularly) ............................................................................................................................

II. Make questions with the underlined words.

1. Our school year starts on September 5th. ............................................................................................................................

2. Summer vacation lasts for three months. ............................................................................................................................

3. The longest vacation is summer vacation. ............................................................................................................................

4. I usually visit my grandparents during my vacation. ............................................................................................................................

5. My mother works eight hours a day. ............................................................................................................................

6. Mr. Robinson is an English teacher. ............................................................................................................................

III. Give advice with “should” or “shouldn’t”, using the words given in brackets.

Example: You look very pale and terrible. (see a doctor) You should see a doctor.

1. You work until 11 every night. (not work so hard) …………………………………………………………………………………

2.It's Mai's birthday on Saturday. I think we should do something. (buy her a nice birthday present) ………………………………………………………………………………

3.The car did not start this morning. (take it to the garage) …………………………………………………………………………………

4.Our train leaves at 6 o’clock tomorrow morning. (go to bed early tonight) …………………………………………………………………………………

5.He always gives you the wrong advice. (not listen to him) …………………………………………………………………………………

6.Everything will be all right. (not worry so much) …………………………………………………………………………………

7.He doesn’t like this job because it’s so boring. (look for another one) …………………………………………………………………………………

91

8.It’s so late to play music so loudly, we’ll wake up the neighbours. (turn it off) …………………………………………………………………………………

9.Your hair is so long. (have a haircut) …………………………………………………………………………………

10.He doesn’t understand the lesson. (meet the teacher after class) …………………………………………………………………………………

IV. You the following set of words and phrases to write complete sentences.

1. People/ decorate/ homes/ plants/ flowers. …………………………………………………………………………………

2. .People/ try/nice/ polite/ each other/ because/ they/ want/good luck/ New Year's Day. …………………………………………………………………………………

3.They/ visit/ relatives/ friends/ they/ exchange/ New Year's wishes. …………………………………………………………………………………

4 .Many people/ go/ pagoda/ have/ happy year/ their family. …………………………………………………………………………………

5.Tet/ a time/ fun/ festivals/ throughout/ country. ………………………………………………………………………………… ===================================================

ANSWER KEYS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. B 11.D 21.A 31.B 41.D 2. D 12.D 22.B 32.D 42.B 3. A 13.B 23.D 33.D 43.D 4. A 14.A 24.C 34.B 44.A 5. C 15.D 25.B 35.C 45.B 92

6. A 16.A 26.B 36.B 46.B 7. D 17.C 27.B 37.D 47.C 8. C 18.C 28.B 38.B 48.C 9. A 19.D 29.A 39.B 49.B 10. B 20.B 30.C 40.A 50.D II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1.C 4.B 7.A 10.D 13.C 2.A 5.D 8.B 11.D 14.A 3.D 6.C 9.A 12.B 15.A B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences 1.D 11.C 21.D 31.A 41.A 2.C 12.A 22.A 32.C 42.B 3.C 13.B 23.C 33.B 43.C 4.A 14.B 24.C 34.B 44.C 5.C 15.B 25.B 35.A 45.B 6.C 16.D 26.A 36.D 46.B 7.B 17.C 27.A 37.B 47.D 8.A 18.A 28.C 38.C 48.C 9.D 19.A 29.A 39.C 49.D 10.A 20.B 30.B 40.A 50.B

D. WORD FORM I. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following sentences 1. relatives

6. toothache

11. repainting

16. Interestingly

2. gatherings

7. fantastic

12. mountainous

17. careful

93

3. celebrate

8. activities

13. sleeping

18. oldest

4. Traditionally

9. naturally

14. unforgettable

19. depth

5. happiness

10.decorations

15. attractions

20. leaves

II. Give the correct form of the word in brackets to complete the following text.

1. greatly

2. sticky

3. reunion

5. decorations

6. celebrations

7. activities

E. VERB FORM I . Using “should” or “shouldn’t” to make the correct sentences.

1. You shouldn’t park 2. should I cook 3 You should wear 4. You shouldn’t smoke 5. We should arrive 6. Should I send 7. I should apply 8. I should write 9. I shouldn’t eat 10.We should complaint II. Give the correct form of the verbs in the simple future.

1. Will they come 2. will you get 3. will you do 4. is she 5. does the sunset 6. she will get the job 7. Is David 8. will the weather be 9. do you see 10. does he get III. Choose the correct modal to complete each sentence.

1. Shall 2. must 3 Would 4. can 5. must 9. should 6. shouldn’t 7. should 8. mustn’t 10. must IV. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets.

1. celebrate 2. won’t buy 3. is repainting

4 wear

5. cleaning

8. eating

6. occurs

7. Will they give

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1.A 6.D 11.A 16.B 2.A 7.A 12.D 17.D

94

3.B

8.A

13.A

18.C

4.B 9.C 14.B 19.B 5.C 10.C 15.B 20.D II. Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.

1. have → has 6. an orange small → a small orange 2. homeworks→ homework 7. in → with 3. a bus → bus 8. any→ some 4. doesn’t → don’t 9. much→ many 5. two → second 10. play→ player F. READING I. Read the passage and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

1. F 2.T 3.F 4. F 5.T 6.T II. Read and choose the correct answers.

1.C 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.C III. Read the following text and answer the questions below.

1. They can fly kites and experience the “Winter Story Cruise” 2. Anyone can enjoy the traditional experiences and games for free.

3. They can enjoy various traditional games in the 11 areas of Hangang Park.

4. They are Yutnori, Neolttwigi, etc.

5. It’s aiming to greet New Year’s day, Seollal which, is one of the most special holidays for Korean people.

F. WRITING I. Use “should + verb” to make the sentences.

1. You should take a short rest.

2. She should stay in bed.

3. He should clean it every day.

4. You should learn your lessons carefully.

5. She should take an aspirin.

6. You should brush them regularly.

II. Make questions with the underlined words.

1. When does your school year start?

2. How long does summer vacation last?

3. Which vacation is the longest?

4. What do you usually do during your vacation?

5. How many hours does your mother work a day?

6. What does Mr. Robinson do?

95

III. Give advice with “should” or “shouldn’t”, using the words given in brackets.

1. You shouldn’t work so hard.

2. We should buy her a nice birthday present.

3. You should take it to the garage.

4. You should go to bed early tonight 5. You shouldn’t listen to him.

6. You shouldn’t worry so much.

7. He should look for another one.

8. We should turn it off.

9. You should have a haircut.

10. He should meet the teacher after class.

IV. You the following set of words and phrases to write complete sentences.

1. People decorate their home with plants and flowers.

2. People try to be nice to each other because they want good luck on New Year’s Day. 3. They visit their relatives, and they exchange New Year’s wishes.

4. Many people go to the pagoda in order to have a happy year for their family.

5. Tet is a time for fun and festivals throughout the country.

96

BÀI TẬP CHUYÊN SÂU TIẾNG ANH 7 TẬP 1

1

ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 1: HOBBIES A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. bird B. girl C. first D. sister B. sun C. hurt D. turn 2. A. burn 3. A. nurse B. picture C. surf D. return 4. A. neighbor B. favorite C. culture D. tourist B. hour C. hotel D. hot 5. A. hobby 6. A. prefer B. better C. teacher D. worker 7. A. bear B. hear C. dear D. near B. concern C. concert D. combine 8. A. collect 9. A. absent B. government C. dependent D. enjoy 10. A. future B. return C. picture D. culture 11. A. exciting B. excellent C. experience D. expensive 12. A. hobby B. cycle C. bye D. why 13. A. pottery B. collect C. melody D. monopoly 14. A. bird-watching B. children C. school D. challenge 15. A. future B. return C. picture D. culture 16. A. piano B. fish C. like D. badminton 17. A. arrange B. game C. make D. skate 18. A. mother B. some C. cold D. come 19. A. absent B. government C. dependent D. enjoy 20. A. telephone B. post office C. directory D. moment 21. A. number B. Sunday C. excuse D. fun 22. A. second B. personal C. tomorrow D. movie 23. A. machine B. kitchen C. teacher D. children 24. A. city B. many C. country D. cry 25. A. book B. room C. stool D. school 26. A. soon B. see C. sure D. sorry 27. A. amazing B. orange C. table D. favorite 28. A. country B. journalist C. younger D. countryside 29. A. game B. arrange C. skate D. cake 30. A. hobby B. doll C. collect D. for 31. A. difficult B. unusual C. uncle D. result 32. A. piano B. fish C. like D. badminton 33. A. rest B. help C. garden D. identify 34. A. heard B. pearl C. heart D. earth 35. A. button B. circus C. suggest D. future 36. A. sofa B. away C. banana D. occasion 37. A. light B. fine C. knife D. principle 2

B. card C. bare D. marvelous 38. A. farm 39. A. both B. bottle C. Scotland D. cotton B. farm C. warm D. marmalade 40. A. park 41. A. nature B. pure C. picture D. culture 42. A. faithful B. failure C. fairly D. painted B. cover C. economical D. ceiling 43. A. country 44. A. new B. sew C. few D. nephew 45. A. with B. library C. willing D. if B. angry C. manager D. damage 46. A. ask 47. A. notebook B. hoping C. cock D. potato B. verb C. deer D. merely 48. A. engineer 49. A. theory B. therefore C. neither D. weather 50. A. shoot B. mood C. poor D. smooth II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. welcome B. upstairs C. hobby D. eggshell 2. A. difficult B. unusual C. expensive D. occasion 3. A. challenge B. outdoor C. model D. enjoy 4. A. melody B. pottery C. creative D. gallery 5. A. receive B. fragile C. unique D. arrange 6. A. essential B. unusual C. occasion D. calorie 7. A. mural B. monopoly C. graffiti D. conjunction 8. A. reporter B. mountain C. gardener D. newspaper 9. A. favourite B. unusual C. popular D. common 10. A. pottery B. flower C. silent D. prepare 11. A. exciting B. melody C. experience D. expensive 12. A. gymnastics B. gardening C. basketball D. volleyball 13. A. affect B. excuse C. attend D. damage 14. A. language B. character C. complete D. spinach 15. A. anniversary B. adventure C. improve D. appointment B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Nowadays people hours sitting in front of computers.

A. spend

B. last

C. set

D. take

2. I think you should take up swimming _____it is suitable for your health condition.

A. so 3. My family enjoys A. garden - to 3

B. because

C. although

D. but

because we can sell vegetables and flowers money.

B. gardening - for C. gardening - with

D. garden - of

4. If your hobby is greeting card making, you can give your

to your friends as

presents.

A. hobby

B. money

C. greetings

D. products

5. My sister’s hobby is sewing, and she can get the sewing patterns from the ___ magazines.

A. fashion

B. cooking

C. sports

D. science

6. My brother doesn’t like ice-skating because he thinks it is A. danger

B. in danger

C. dangerous

.

D. endangered

7. My sister is very keen on swimming, and she goes swimming three __ A. time

B. a time

C. times

a week.

D. timings

8. We often read the instructions carefully in order to make

of the things we like

best.

A. meanings

B. models

9. You need to be

C. copies

D. uses

to follow eggshell carving because it may take two weeks to

complete one shell.

A. careful

B. interesting

C. fit

D. patient

10. If you choose sewing as your hobby, you will A. do

B. make

11. There are many A. answers 12. Will you A. pick up

C. take

B. reasons

C. details

B. look for

C. take up

B. difficult

B. care

B. others

C. danger

D. interesting in using colors.

C. creative

D. imagine

people.

C. another

16. I join a photography club, and all members love 4

D. find

and boring?

15. A hobby helps you to connect with A. other

D. facts

making models in the future?

14. I love my sister’s paintings because she is very A. careless

D. get

why it is important to have a hobby.

13. Do you think that hobby is A. easy

your own clothes.

D. the other photos.

A. take

B. taking

17. What does your father do A. in

C. make

D. making

his free time?

B. at

C. on

18. I think a hobby will always give you

D. while and help you

.

A. pleased - relax

B. pleasure - relaxed

C. pleased - relaxing

D. pleasure - relax

19. You can share your stamps A. with - at

other collectors

B. to - at

C. with - in

20.I think this hobby does not cost you much, and A. most

B. all of

a stamp club.

D. to - in

you need is time.

C. some

D. all

21. Hoa likes music. She often …………. to music in late evenings.

A. listen

B. listening

C. listens

D. to listens

22. I enjoy …………. baminton after school.

A. doing

B. playing

C. seeing

D. going

C. collecting

D. collections

23. Ann has a large …………. of stamps.

A. collect

B. collection

24. How …………. you go to the library after school?

A. often

B. much

C. many

D. usually

25. My sister usually goes to the library with me. She likes___ comic books very much.

A. read

B. reading

C. to read

D. reads

26. In big cities, there are many kinds of _____ for young people.

A. entertain

B. entertains

C. entertainment D. entertaining

27. What _____ does Minh like playing in his free time?

A. activities

B. sports

C. things

D. subjects

28. He goes swimming when he ______ free time.

A. have

B. is having

C. has

D. will have

29. My uncle likes ______ the vegetables we grow ourselves.

A. to eat

B. eat

C. eats

D. eating

30. My close friend draws very well. She will be a …………. artist one day.

5

A. fame

B. famous

C. famously

D. famed

31.We ________ swimming because it’s fun and good exercise.

A. like

B. are liking

C. will like

D. liked

32. My grandparents don’t like ________ in the city because it’s noisy and crowded.

A. live

B. lived

C. living

D. to living

33. Fire needs oxygen to burn. It ________ without oxygen.

A. burn

B. burns

C. don’t burn

D. doesn’t burn

34. How much time do you spend ________ the Internet per day?

A. surf

B. to surf

C. surfing

D. to be surfing

35.I don’t mind ________ a DVD, but I prefer ________ to the cinema.

A. to watch - to go

B. watching – go

C. to watch – going

D. watching – to go

36. _____ is her father's hobby. He likes going to the zoo to see beautiful parrots or canaries.

A. Collecting birds

B. Raising pets

C. Bird-watching

D. Arranging flowers

37. My mother loves ____ She usually grows vegetables and takes care of them when she has free time.

A. cooking food

B. gardening

C. cycling

D. eating fruits

38. My brothers would like to_____ mountain climbing. They think they will enjoy themselves and _____ some nice photos.

A. go/ take

B. pick/take

C. take/collect

39. I prefer listening to music____ very much. Gentle

D. go/pick

and nice lyrics of old

songs always attract my attention.

A. headphones

B. noise

C. colours

D. melodies

40. My father will go_____ on the sea when my family goes to the beach this week.

A. gymnastics

B. camping

C. horse-riding

D.

surfing

41. I love making ____ because I can create some nice and unique clay bottles or cups to give my friends.

6

A. pottery

B. paper kites

C. architectures

D.

lanterns

42. __ is my unusual hobby. I like moving on the ice and feel like a beautiful swan.

A. Swimming

B. Eating ice-creams

C. Ice-skating

D. Making models

43. She took _ playing the piano when she was a young girl.

A. in

B. over

C. up

D. on

44. He ____ karate club next month. He_____ to improve his health.

A. will join/ wants

B. joins/wants

C. will join/ will want

D. is joining/ wants

45. Our grandfather he ___us how to carve eggshells this weekend.

A. will promise/will show

B. is promising/shows

C. promises/will show

D. promised/shows

46. My mother____ me to the museum tomorrow because she______ to finish a lot of her work.

A. doesn't take/ has

B. won't take/ has

C. won't take/ doesn't have

D. doesn't take/ doesn't have

47. The bus __ in two minutes. I____late for school when I _____it.

A. arrives/ will be/ miss

B. will arrive/ will be /miss

C. arrives/ am/ will miss

D. will arrive/ am/ will miss

48. My brother hates______ horror films. They make him________ scary a lot.

A. to watch/ feel

B. watching/ to feel

C. to watch/ to feel

D. watching/ feel

49. It's interesting______ a puppy. I enjoy_____ after it very much.

A. having/ looking

B. to have/ to look

C. having/ to look

D. to have/ looking

50. One of my favorite hobbies is _____ comics. I love_______ more famous ones.

A. read/ collecting

B. reading/collecting

C. to read/ to collect

D. reading/ collected

7

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences.

1. My uncle usually takes a lot of _______ photos.

(BEAUTY)

2. I think collecting old bowls is a very _______ hobby.

(BORE)

3. You can use carved eggshells as _________ in your house.

(DECORATE)

4. I like reading books because it __________ my knowledge.

(WIDE)

5. Model making is a ____________ ways of spending time.

(WONDER)

6. Reading books can also develop our __________

(IMAGINE)

7. That girl can use leaves to make ____________ sounds.

(MUSIC)

8. You should choose a hobby because it will give you _______and (PLEASE) help you relax

9. Nick’s hobby is collecting stamps. He is a stamp ____________

(COLLECT)

10. Hoa is very _________and she paints very well.

(CREATE)

11. Tom and his close friend are playing with his colourful train (ENJOY) toys______

12. He thinks his brother has an ____ hobby - carving shells. It's (USUAL) quite strange to him.

13. It's____ that he carves beautiful faces into small woods.

(AMAZE)

14. My mother hangs her beautiful pictures on the wall as (DECORATE) home______.

15. , Staying at home is the most.____________way of relaxation.

(BORE)

16. It is__________to eat a lot of junk food.

(HEALTH)

17. A thief stole all the_____________ in the museum.

(PAINT)

18. There are___________symptoms when you have a cold. (differ) (DIFFER) 19. He gets a cold, so he has a _______nose.

(RUN)

20. He drinks ________beer than me.

(LITTLE)

D. VERB FORMS I. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

8

1. Sally and her family love (go) 2. Her mum likes (lie)

to the park in the summer.

on the blanket and loves (read)

her

favourite

magazines.

3. Anna’s family (like)

the park because they love (be)

4. I enjoy (collect)

dolls and it becomes my pleasure.

5. We love (watch)

new films, and we (go)

outdoors.

to watch a new

Hollywood film next weekend.

6. My brother hates (do) 7. Our uncle (play) 8. I (collect) 9. In 2100, people (travel)

the same things day after day. badminton once a week. a lot of stamps from foreign countries so far. in flying cars.

10. I’m so hungry, Mum. - I (make)

you some sandwiches.

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. You (think) __________ collecting stamps costs much money?

2. My father thinks mountain climbing (be) __________ more dangerous than skating.

3. Every year, my mother (give) __________ me a nice doll on my birthday.

4. My brother (not like) __________ collecting stamps, he likes collecting glass bottles.

5. My sister likes (cook) __________ very much. She can cook many good foods.

6. Does your brother like (listen) __________ to music in his free time?

7. I think in the future, more people (enjoy) __________ going out by bicycles.

8. My father says when he's retired, he (go) __________ back to his village to do the gardening.

9. We are planting trees around our school now. Our school (be) __________ surrounded by a lot of green trees.

10. Lan says she loves collecting pens but she (not/continue) __________ this hobby from next year.

III.

Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs in the list.

9

like (2) sing

live read

This is my favourite singer. He (1) America. He (3) (5)

be go

make

a famous rock star. He (2)

all around the world and (4)

his songs and(6)

travel write

in

in rock concerts. He

his own video dips. In his free time, he (7)

staying at home listening to his CDs. At weekends, he usually (8) expensive restaurants with his friends. He also (9) things. I can’t wait to see him perform live. I (10)

to

a lot of books about strange him so much.

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. The children are playing boarding games, and their mother is arranging flowers.

A B C D 2. One of his father's favourite hobbies is playing horse-riding, and he just practises it A B C twice a month.

D 3. He started learning how to play the guitar on his elder brother.

A B C D 4.Your favourite football match will begin at 3 p.m., so you should arrive there A B C soon to get a good seat.

D 5. She will attend the judo class next month because she intends to have a long A B C vacation in Ho Chi Minh City.

D 6. He loves to listen to classical music, but he spends a little time doing it.

A B C D 7. She didn't enjoy the party very much because she didn't like music and A B C to dance there.

D 8. She’s 18 and she’s France. She lives in a village near Toulouse. She studies A B C engineering at university.

10

D 9. She has ashort black hair and very dark eyes. She is intelligent and funny, but C A B sometimes she’s a bit sad too.

D 10.She loves music and she likes writing songs. She can plays the guitar very well and A B C she has a beautiful voice.

D

II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. Nam is my classmates. He watches TV every night. ___________ 2. I think collecting stamps are interesting. ___________ 3. My dad cooks very good. He loves preparing meals for our family. ___________ 4. I enjoy to ride my bike to school. ___________ 5. We usually go in a small lake out of the city at weekends. ___________ 6. Do you still play football next year? ___________ 7. We like doing fishing because it is relaxing. ___________ 8. Do you think bird-watching interesting? ___________ 9. I think playing volleyball interest because it is a team game ___________ 10. In my opinion, more people played monopoly in the future. ___________ F. READING I. Read the text and choose the correct answer.

If you enjoy cycling for pleasure, doing it in London can be a shock. There are not enough lanes especially for bikes, and making your way through the traffic can be very risky. But if you have great passion, cycling in London can be exciting, and it is an inexpensive way of keeping fit if you live there. Some cyclists don’t mind spending a lot of money on expensive bikes. However, if you just want a basic bike that is only for occasional use, there are many cheap choices. Several markets have cheap bikes on sale which may not be impressive to look at but should be satisfactory. You should buy a cycling helmet if you want to cycle in London. Wearing a cycling helmet is not compulsory in Britain, but it is a good idea to wear one for protection.

1. What is the main idea of the passage?

A. Cycling helmets B. Cheap bicycles C. Bicycle markets D. Cycling in London 2. According to the passage, cycling in London is A. easy B. difficult C. tiring D. boring 3. The word “it” in line 3 refers to A. cycling B. passion C. excitement D. doing exercise 11

4. The difficulty of cycling in London is described in lines A. 2 B. 5 C. 5-6 D. 8-9 5. According to the passage, all the followings are true EXCEPT that A. It is compulsory to wear a helmet when cycling in Britain.

B. Some bikes in London are cheap.

C. There are not many lanes especially for bikes.

D. Some cyclists don’t want to buy expensive bikes.

II. Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs in the list. like (2) sing

live read

be go

travel write

make

This is my favourite singer. He (1) a famous rock star. He (2) in all around the world and (4) in rock concerts. He America. He (3) (5) his songs and(6) his own video dips. In his free time, he (7) staying at home listening to his CDs. At weekends, he usually (8) to expensive restaurants with his friends. He also (9) a lot of books about strange things. I can’t wait to see him perform live. I (10) him so much.

III. Choose the most suitable word for each space.

What do you like doing best (1) your spare time? My cousin Paul likes going (2) in the country and (3) photos. Sometimes he (4) with his friends, and they (5) at the park or at the beach. They always (6) a good time. His brother Chris isn’t (7) on walking. He spends most of the (8) at home.

1. A. for B. when C. in D. at 2. A. for walks B. walks C. a walk D. to walk 3. A. making B. having C. taking D. doing 4. A. travels B. gets up C. sees D. goes out 5. A. enjoy B. have fun C. hobby D. go 6. A. have B. make C. do D. like 7. A. interested B. out C. decided D. keen 8. A. other B. time C. people D. money IV. Read the article and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

After school Susan goes home to do her model-making. She loves making models. She started about a year ago. She needs about two weeks to make a model. Then she puts it on the shelf in her bedroom. She has about twenty models now. She thinks she will need to get another shelf soon. Last term she tried to start a club for model-making at school but the teachers and other children weren’t interested. She thinks she has a lot of fun anyway.

True False 1. Susan makes models when she stays at school.

2. She has made her models for about one year.

12

3. It takes her two weeks to make two models.

4. She will need another shelf for her models soon.

5. Susan tried to start a club for model making and the teachers and other children were interested in it very much.

G. WRITING I. Complete the conversation, using the words or phrases given.

A: What is your hobby?

B: Well, I like collecting stamps.

A: How can you collect your stamps?

B (1) ____________________________________________________________ (I/ buy/ post office. I/ also/ ask/ members of family/ relatives) (2) ____________________________________________________________ (Sometimes/I/ exchange/ stamps/ other people) A:How do you organize your collection?

B: (3) ___________________________________________________________ (I/ divide/ different groups/ animals/ plants/ birds/ so on) A:Why do you collect stamps?

B: (4) ___________________________________________________________ (I/ know more/ people/ animals/ plants) A:What will you do next?

B: (5) ___________________________________________________________ (I/ collect/ more stamps) II. Make correct sentences from the words and phrases given.

1. When/ you/ start/ hobby? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2.We/ find/ make/ models/ very interesting/ because/ we/ should/ creative. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3.I/ think/ future/ people/ take up/ more/ outdoor activities. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4. My best friend/ not/ like/ mountain climbing/ because/ he/ afraid/ heights. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5.My sister/ enjoy/ cook/ and/ make/ new dishes/ her own.

13

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ III. Rewrite the sentences, using the given words.

1. What is the price of this watch?

How much _____________________________________________?

2. What is the price of these beautiful scarves?

How much ______________________________________________?

3. Can you tell me the way to Dong Nai Post office?

Can you tell me __________________________________________?

4. Can you tell me the way to the station?

Can you tell me __________________________________________?

5. They are fast typists.

They ___________________________________________________ 6. Peter is a hard worker.

Peter ___________________________________________________ 7. There are no bottles on the shelf.

There aren’t _____________________________________________ 8. We have no time to prepare the speech.

We don’t have ___________________________________________ IV. Use the words and phrases to write a passage.

1. Stamp collection/ be/ interesting hobby.

2. You/ can learn many things, such/ the geography/ a country/ stamps.

3. Postal stamps/ be a source/ interesting facts/ important dates/ every country/ the world.

4. It/ make stamp collecting/ become very popular.

5. As you look at the pages/ a stamp album, you/ can learn interesting details/ foreign customs/ arts/ literature/ history/ culture.

6. Their colors/ can make/ you feel relaxed/ happy.

7. Collecting stamps/ can become/ a business.

8. If you are lucky/ finding/ special stamp, it/ will bring/ you some money besides knowledge/ pleasure. ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................

14

....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... =================================================== ANSWER KEYS UNIT 1: HOBBIES A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. D 11. A 21. C 31. A 41. B 2. B 12. A 22. D 32. C 42. C 3. B 13. A 23. A 33. C 43. D 4. D 14. C 24. D 34. C 44. B 5. B 15. A 25. A 35. A 45. B 6. A 16. C 26. C 36. D 46. A 7. A 17. A 27. B 37. D 47. C 8. C 18. C 28. B 38. C 48. B 9. D 19. D 29. B 39. A 49. A 10. B 20. C 30. C 40. C 50. C II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. B 4. C 7. A 10. D 13. D 2. A 5. B 8. A 11. B 14. C 3. D 6. D 9. B 12. A 15. A B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.A 11.B 21.C 31.A 41.A 2.B 12.C 22.B 32.C 42.C 3.B 13.B 23.B 33.D 43.C 4.D 14.C 24.A 34.C 44.A 5.A 15.A 25.B 35.D 45.C 6.C 16.B 26.C 36.C 46.B 7.C 17.A 27.B 37.B 47.A 8.B 18.D 28.C 38.A 48.D 9.D 19.C 29.D 39.D 49.D 10.B 20.D 30.B 40.D 50.B C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. beautiful 15

6. imagination

11. enjoyably

16. unhealthy

2. boring

7. musical

12.unusual

17.painting

3. decorations

8. pleasure

13.amazing

18.different

4. widens

9. collection

14. decorations

19.running

5. wonderful

10. creative

15.boring

20.less

D. VERB FORMS I. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

1. going / to go

6. doing

2. lying - reading

7. plays

3. likes - being

8. have collected

4. collecting

9. will travel

5. watching (/ to watch) - will go

10. will make

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

III.

1. Do you think...

6. listening

2. is

7. will enjoy

3. give

8. will go

4. doesn’t like

9. will be

5. cooking

10. won’t continue

Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs in the list.

1. is

2. lives

3. travels

4. sings

5. writes

6. makes

7. likes

8. goes

9. reads

10. like

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. B

2. C

3. D

4. A

5. A

8. A 9. A 10. C II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1.classmates → classmate 6. Do → Will 2. are → is 7. doing → going 3. good →well 8. think → find 4. to ride → riding 9. interest→ interesting 5. in →to 10. play →willplay 6. A

7. D

16

F. READING I. Read the text and choose the correct answer. l. D

2. B

3. A

4. A

5. A

II. Choose the most suitable word for each space. l. C

2. A

3. C

4. D

5. B

6. A

7. D

8. B

III. Read the article and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

1. False 2. True 3. False 4. True 5. False G. WRITING I. Complete the conversation, using the words or phrases given.

1. I buy stamps from the post office. I also ask the members of my family and my relatives.

2. Sometimes I exchange my stamps with other people.

3. I divide my stamps into different groups, such as animals, plants, birds, and so on.

4. Because I know more about people, animals, and plants.

5. I will collect more stamps.

II. Make correct sentences from the words and phrases given.

1. When did you start your hobby?

2. We find making models very interesting because we should be creative.

3. I think in the future people will take up more outdoor activities.

4. My best friend does not like mountain climbing because he is afraid of heights.

5. My sister enjoys cooking and making new dishes on her own.

III. Rewrite the sentences, using the given words.

1. How much is this watch?

2. How much are these beautiful scarves?

3. Can you tell me how to get to Dong Nai Post office?

4. Can you tell me how to get to the station?

5. They type fast.

6. Peter works hard.

7. There aren’t any bottles on the shelf.

8. We don’t have any time to prepare the speech.

17

IV. Use the words and phrases to write a passage.

Stamp collection is an interesting hobby. You can learn many things, such as the geography of a country from stamps. Postal stamps are a source of interesting facts and important dates about every country in the world. It makes stamp collecting become very popular.

As you look at the pages of a stamp album, you can learn interesting details of foreign customs, arts, literature, history and culture. Their colors can make you feel relaxed and happy.

Collecting stamps can become a business. If you are lucky in finding a special stamp, it will bring you some money besides knowledge and pleasure. =================================================== ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 2: HEALTH A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. put B. adult C. junk D. sun 2. A. itchy B. riding C. sick D. swimming B. children C. headache D. architect 3. A. chemical 4. A. regularly B. identify C. really D. healthy 5. A. cycling B. doctor C. aerobics D. calories 6. A. coordinate B. triathlon C. allergy D. calorie 7. A. leaf B. life C. knife D. of 8. A. monopoly B. melody C. compound D. concentrate 9. A. paragraph B. cough C. although D. enough 10. A. vegetarian B. depression C. essential D. attention 11. A. myth B. cycling C. itchy D. allergy 12. A. headache B. spread C. health D. weak 13. A. fat B. leaf C. of D. safe 14. A. flu B. sunburn C. junk D. much 15. A. wash B. wear C. wake D. wrap 16. A. sick B. swimming C. itchy D. riding 17. A. really B. healthy C. regularly D. identify 18. A. bad B. tall C. dad D. sad 19. A. although B. enough C. paragraph D. cough 18

20. A. traditional 21. A. attract 22. A. delicious 23. A. answer 24. A. burn 25. A. chimpanzee 26. A. of 27. A. conquer 28. A. pork 29. A. tuna 30. A. purity 31. A. see 32. A. pull 33. A. course 34. A. bark 35. A. cotton 36. A. dear 37. A. bury 38. A. folk 39. A. shout 40. A. about 41. A. chain 42. A. saddle 43. A. drummer 44. A. flame 45. A. darkness 46. A. hunt 47. A. book 48. A. figure 49. A. over 50. A. baggage

B. essential B. actor B. special B. further B. collect B. mechanic B. funny B. cook B. support B. tutor B. burning B seen B. sugar B. court B. share B. bottle B. hear B. curtain B. work B. sugar B. amount B. entertain B. case B. future B. fame B. warmth B. pullover B. floor B. bright B. rose B. village

C. audition C. guitarist C. musical C. butter C. alone C. chemistry C. wife C. centimeter C. perform C. tofu C. cure C. sportsman C. plural C. encourage C. dare C. cold C. bear C. burn C. pork C. share C. should C. bargain C. chase C. number C. came C. market C. under C. hook C. fight C. cover C. manage

D. picture D. gallery D. physician D. birth D. neighbour D. earache D. bookshelf D. key D. information D. unusual D. durable D. sure D. study D. cough D. bare D. common D. clear D. turn D. corn D. surgery D. ground D. complain D. basement D. umbrella D. manner D. remark D. funny D. cooker D. sight D. chosen D. stage

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. regular B. allergy C. already D. yesterday 2. A. computer B. depression C. important D. concentrate 3. A. healthy B. disease C. sickness D. expert 4. A. amount B. sunburn C. toothache D. pattern 5. A. recover B. vitamin C. calorie D. temperature 6. A. turmeric B. essential C. originate D. photography 7. A. opera B. rural C. delicious D. anthem 8. A. allergy B. backache C. toothache D. obesity 9. A. dizziness B. temperature C. computer D. regularly 19

10. A. wonder 11. A. garbage 12. A. government 13. A. recycle 14. A. teacher 15. A. dangerous

B. import B. certain B. remember B. satisfy B. habit B. accident

C. include C. liquid C. natural C. citizen C. escape C. telephone

D. reduce D. protect D. chemicals D. universe D. worker D. engineer

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. You should eat a lot of fruits and vegetables because they vitamin A, which is good for the eyes.

A. run

B. take

2. The health

C. provide

D. get

from that diet expert is that you should eat less junk food and count

your calories if you are becoming fat.

A. advices

B. ideas

C. tip

D. tips

3. The seafood I ate this morning makes me feel A. itchy

B. weak

all over.

C. running

4. If you want to be fit, stay outdoors more and do more A. physics

B. physic

5. Do more exercise A. and

C. physical

B. so

C. but

B. rest

D. physically

D. although

C. sleep

7. Eat less high-fat foods to keep you from A. gaining

activities.

eat more fruit and vegetables.

6. After working in computer for long hours, you should A. wake

D. well

B. reducing

your eyes and relax.

D. sleep in

fat.

C. getting

D. rising

8. We should follow the advice from doctors and health in order to keep fit.

A. managers 9. Have a healthy A. lifeline 10.They go A. swims 20

B. experts

C. people

D. workers

and you can enjoy your life.

B. lively

C. lives

D. lifestyle

outside even when it’s cold.

B. swiming

C. swimming

D. swam

11. Rob eats a lot of fast food and he A. spends

B. brings

12. We need to spend less time A. playing 13. To prevent A. cold 14. Be careful with A. who

on a lot of weight.

C. takes computer games.

B. to playing

C. play

B. mumps

C. flu

D. headache

C. what

D. that

you eat and drink.

B. this

B. stomachache

16. In order to have good A. spirit

.

C. obesity

D. fitness

, you should eat lightly and laugh cheerfully.

B. body

17. Do you believe that eating A. most

D. to play

, you should eat a lot of garlic and keep your body warm.

15. Eating a lot of junk food may lead to your A. pain

D. puts

C. health

D. mood

carrots helps you see at night?

B. the most

C. much more

D. less

18. We should try to keep everything around us clean and then flu will find it spread.

A. difficultly

B. difficulties

19. My father does morning A. running

B. well

C. difficult

D. difficulty

every day.

C. exercise

D. weak

20. We should play sports or do exercise in order to stay in A. fit

B. health

C. look

21. You can avoid some diseases by A. keeping

B. taking

B. because

D. shape

yourself clean.

C. looking

22. The Japanese eat a lot of fish instead of meat A. but

.

C. although

D. bringing they stay more healthy.

D. so

23. She looks tired. What’s the ……….. with her?

A. matter B. happen C. wrong 24. Minh is absent from class today ……….. he is ill.

A. but 21

B. because

C. when

D. right D. so

to

25. He is a(n) ______. He doesn't have a habit of eating meat.

A. patient

B. expert

C. vegetarian

D. adult

26. She usually eats some sweet cakes before going to sleep, so she may put____ weight if she continues to do that.

A. in

B. up

C. on

27. Watching too much television is not good A. with

B. to

D. into you or your eyes.

C. at

D. for

28. When you have flu, you may have a cough and a A. runny

B. running

nose.

C. flowing

D. noisy

29. When you have a temperature, you should drink more water and rest A. most

B. more

C. most

30. I forgot to wear a sun hat today and I got a A. stomachache

B. earache

.

D. less .

C. backache

D. headache

31. My brother played volleyball with his friends on the beach yesterday. Hissk in turns brown and got some A. sunburns

_____.

B. sickness

C. allergies

32. Don’t eat that type of fish: you may have a/an A. sick

B. sore

33. Do you believe that eating A. much more

B. less

C. energy

D. weight .

D. allergy

carrots helps you see at night?

C. most

D. the most

34. Sorry! I’m busy tonight. I have an ……….. with my doctor at 7 o’clock.

A. opportunity B. occasion C. appointment 35. Don’t eat too ________ candy. It’s bad for your teeth.

D. activity

A. much B. many C. lots of 36. I’m glad ________you’re feeling better.

D. more

A. hear B. hearing C. to hear 37. You should wash your hand ______ meals.

D. of hearing

A. after B. in C. before D. at 38. You can have better health when you______ drinking a lot of soft drink.

A. avoid 22

B. keep

C. get

D. prefer

39. I was caught in the snowy storm yesterday. After that, I had a(n)_____ and a headache so I thought I had flu.

A. earache

B. toothache

C. weakness

D. sore throat

40. Your sister can______ in shape by doing gymnastics regularly.

A. place

B. stay

C. fit

D. turn

41. You will get______ if you gain weight rapidly.

A. cough

B.flu

C. obesity

D. stomach ache

42. You shouldn't go out with your friends today and should relax at home because you can make your flu______. It will be bad for their health.

A. drop

B. spread

C. limit

D. depress

43______ does Minh feel nervous? – Because he’s seeing the dentist.

A. How B. Why 44. ______! You will have a strong heart.

C. What

D. When

A. Eat vegetables more

B. Watch TV more

C. Eat less fruits

D. Wash your face less

45. ______! You will have more time to concentrate on your study.

A. Take more pictures when you go out B. Do your exercises more C. Go to sleep early D. Talk on the telephone with your friends less 46. ______! You can lose your weight more quickly.

A. Take care of yourself more B. Walk around the park more regularly C. Focus on your own study D. Drink mineral water more when you play in the sun 47. She usually plays badminton, ______she eats a lot of healthy food.

A. and

B. but

C. so

D. or

48. You can choose fish and rice for your lunch, ______you can choose fried chicken and some apples for it.

23

A. so

B. or

C. but

D. and

49. He felt pain in his eyes two days ago, ______his mother took him to the doctor.

A. but

B. because

C. or

D. so

50. I like eating ice-creams very much, ______I should eat them less to avoid having toothache.

A. because

B. or

C. but

D. so

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. Is she

enough to run one kilometer?

2. “Ow! Be careful with that coffee.” - “Look, now I have a

(GOOD) (BURNING)

on my arm” of 39.50C

3. Rob has a

4. Don’t eat so quickly. You’ll get a

(TEMPERATE) ___

(TEETH)

5. I have a

in my back. I’m going to lie down.

(PAINFUL)

6. That’s a bad

. Why don’t you have a glass of water?

(COUGHING)

7. “I have

.” - “Why don’t you telephone the doctor?”

(STOMACH)

8. My arm

after the table tennis match

(HURT)

9. “I have a

.” - “That’s because you watch too

(HEAD)

much TV.”

10. Lan was absent from class because of her ______

(SICK)

11. I have an ________- with my doctor at 5 p.m.

(APPOINT)

12. She is still receiving a __________treatment in a hospital.

(MEDICINE)

13. People fell _________when they catch a common cold.

(PLEASE)

14. She’s_____ to seafood. So when she eats them, she will

(ALLERGY)

have stomachache problems.

15. You should choose foods and drinks________ to prevent (CARE) some dangerous diseases.

16. He continues_______ because he is catching a flu.

24

(SNEEZE)

17. He can reduce his serious_____ when he relaxes in time and

(DEPRESS)

does exercise regularly.

18. If you provide yourself with enough vitamins, you will make (CONCENTRATE) a better______ on your work or study.

19. I got ______________ during my beach vacation.

(SUNBURN)

20. Lack of vitamin E can cause skin diseases and __________.

(TIRED)

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. Nam looks brown. He was on holiday last week. He (get)……………sunburn.

2. Getting plenty of rest is very good. It (help)……………….you to avoid depression.

3. The Japanese (eat)………………………..a lot of fish so they are very intelligent.

4. If you wash your hands more, you (have)……………….less chance of catching flu.

5. Eating carrots regularly (help)……………………….you see better.

6. It is very hot outside. Please (wear)…………………a sun hat when you go out.

7. Do more exercise and you (feel)………………………..healthier.

8. I don’t want (be)……………………………..tired tomorrow so I go to bed early.

9. Nowadays, I don’t feel well. I often (feel)……………………….sick and weak.

10. People who ( smile)……………………….more are happier and they live longer.

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. It is important (eat) 2. It (be)

well.

very cold today. You should wear your warm clothes when you (go) out to prevent cold.

3. Do morning exercise every day and you’ll (feel)

better.

4. I have a lot of homework to do this evening, so I (not have) ________ time to watch the football match.

5. (Eat) 6. I (have) 25

junk food and inactivity (be)

the main causes of obesity.

a headache and I need to rest more.

7. I (have)

a toothache so I (have to/ see)

8. I have to take medicines because I (be) 9. Japanese (eat)

the dentist. sick.

more fish instead of meat, so they (stay)

more

healthy.

10. When you (have)

a fever, you (should/ drink)

more

water and rest more.

11. A healthy diet (help)

us feel healthier.

12. Watching TV much (hurt)

your eyes.

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

It’s wonderful to have a hobby to do for pleasure in your free time. My favorite hobby is gardening. I love watching flowers and eating vegetables, so I (1. grow) ........................ a lot of plants in my garden. I usually (2. water) ......................... them in the early mornings.

Sometimes my mother also (3. help) .......................... me care them and my father (4. take).......................... me to the market to buy seeds. I often (5.read) .......................... books tounderstand more about gardening. This weekend I (6.harvest) .......................... carrots and cabbages. Do you know how eager I am? I (7.give).......................... some of them to my grandparents. Also, I (8.take).......................... photos of them and post on facebook. Let’s wait and see!

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. My father often takes my sister and me to the cinema at special occasions.

A B C D 2. My younger brother had temperature and felt tired yesterday, so I was worried about him so much.

A B C D A 3. They provide some food and drink with the poor people in their community more often.

B C D 4. I think he will go to the book fair next Sunday because he loves to read books so much.

A B C D 5. Be less careful when you eat some kinds of food, my dear! You may have allergies if A B C 26

you don't take my advice.

D 6. She likes eating fish, so she also likes drinking mineral water.

A B C D 7. It has been two weeks since he has worked for this non-profit organisation D A B C 8. Eat more junk food! You will get overweight if you keep doing that.

D A B C 9. You shouldn't stay at home all day because it's bad for your health. Go out less!

A B C 10. You have a sore throat, but you shouldn't talk more.

A B C D

D

II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. My brother loves play chess when he has free time. ___________ 2. I find woodcarving interest because it’s creative. ___________ 3. Many people wait for the dentist at the moment. ___________ 4. They have donated blood three months ago. ___________ 5. Did you finished your homework yet? ___________ 6. I’d like to go, and I have to study for my test tonight. ___________ 7. Eat more fast food, or you’ll put on weight. ___________ 8. Do you think staying at home all day is bored? ___________ 9. She is very nervous because she has some spot on her face. ___________ 10. You can play table tennis, both you can go skating at the weekend. ___________

F. READING I. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage.

It’s important to (1) well, especially when you are studying. If you are at primary (2) , you may not go home for lunch and have a cooked meal of meat or (3) and vegetables. A chicken and lettuce sandwich, with some (4) fruit would be a light but (5) lunch. Many people around the world eat plain, boiled (6) two or three times a day. Pupils and students often don’t eat (7) when they’re revising 27

lots of black coffee! And by the way, for an exam – they eat chocolate and (8) doctors say everybody should start the day with healthy (9) . It’s also good for you ________through the day. to drink a lot of (10) 1. A. launching B. emitting C. eat D. peaking 2. A. school B. weapons C. spaceships D. rockets 3. A. to B. towards C. with D. fish 4. A. as soon as B. fresh C. as well as D. such as 5. A. burnt B. explored C. went off D. healthy 6. A. rice B. audience C. observatories D. watcher 7. A. sent back B. returned to C. well D. except for 8. A. weightlessness B. drink C. wavelengths D. length 9. A. space B. atmosphere C. vacant D. breakfast 10.A. scientists B. drivers C. water D. astronauts II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word in the box. spend for

from tired

exercise energy

fit in

ride calorie

We need calories or (1) to do the things every day. For example, when we walk or (2) a bike to school, we spend a certain amount of (3) and even when we sleep, we also use them. But how many calories should we (4) a day to stay in shape? It’s difficult (5) us to calculate. If people want to keep (6) ,they should remember that everyone should have between 1600 and 2500 calories a day.

We get calories (7) the food we eat. If we get too much food and don’t take part (8) any activities, we can get fat quickly. So besides studying, we should do some (9) , play sports or do the housework, such as cleaning the floor, cooking etc., if we don’t eat enough, we feel (10) and weak.

III. Read the following passage and write T (true) or F (false) for each statement.

How many calories can you burn in one hour? Well, it all depends on the activity. You use calories all the time, even when you are resting. Reading, sleeping, sitting and sunbathing all use about 60 calories an hour. Very light activities use 75 calories. Examples are eating, writing, knitting, shaving, driving and washing up. Light activities which use about 100 calories an hour include playing the piano, getting dressed and having a shower. Under moderate activities which use between 100 and 200 calories an hour we can put walking, doing housework, shopping and skating. Energetic activities use 200-400 calories. Those activities include horse riding, cycling, swimming, skipping and dancing. Finally there are strenuous activities which use up to 600 calories an hour. These activities include climbing stairs, jogging, digging the garden and playing football.

28

1. Horse riding uses the most amount of calories.

2. Reading uses as many calories as writing.

3. The calories we burn for eating and washing up are the same.

4. Walking is a very light activity.

5. Sunbathing uses more calories than driving.

6. When we are resting, we don’t burn calories.

7. Having a shower uses only 100 calories an hour.

8. Cycling and dancing use the same amount of calories 9. Playing football uses fewer calories than swimming.

10. The amount of calories we use an hour depends on the activity we do.

IV. Complete the conversation with the phrases in the box. Then answer the questions.

It will cost you

With a bit of luck

I hate to say this

I can’t wait

(The friends are going to the Buckingham Palace.)

David: This is great. (1) to see inside Buckingham Palace.

Peter: Yeah, maybe the Queen will be our tour guide!

Linda: I think we should join the queue. The last tour starts in ten minutes.

David: What’s the matter, Susan? Are you OK? Susan: No, I don’t feel very well. I have a headache and I feel really hot. Maybe I shouldn’t come on the tour.

David: Hey, everyone. Susan doesn’t feel very well. (2) but I think we should go home with her.

Peter: But how about these tickets? (3) . We can’t go home!

David: Yes, we can. (4) we can get our money back.

G. WRITING I. Write the conversations for each situation to give advice, using the phrases given.

Then practise them with your partners.

Example: (toothache/ eat any more sweet things / go to the dentist ) A: What’s the matter?

B: I have toothache.

A: Poor you! You shouldn’t eat any more sweet things. You should go to the dentist.

1.(flu/ be at school / stay at home ) A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ B: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 29

2.(earache/ go to the doctor / wait for it to be better ) A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ B: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3.(stomachache/ lie down / eat anything ) A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ B: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4.(headache/ read any books / take a painkiller ) A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ B: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5.(sore throat/ take some medicine / eat any crisps ) A: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ B: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ A: ____________________________________________________________________ II. Make correct sentences from the words and phrases given.

1. We/ keep/ our bodies/ warm/ avoid/ flu/ a cold. ____________________________________________________________ 2. Getting/ enough/ rest/ help/ you/ concentrate/ school. ____________________________________________________________ 3. Vitamins/ play/ important/ role/ our diet. ____________________________________________________________

30

4. You/ not/ play/ more/ computer games/ free time. ____________________________________________________________ 5. Doctor/ asking/ Mai/ questions/ about/ health problems. ____________________________________________________________ III. Can you rewrite the following sentences in correct English?

1. Laughing is not good with health. _______________________________________________________________ 2. Some people have a very bad habit in littering in public. _______________________________________________________________ 3. People who live in a dusty area often suffer on diseases. _______________________________________________________________ 4. In prevent flu, we should keep our hands clean, out feet warm. _______________________________________________________________ 5. She has a sore throat yesterday. _______________________________________________________________ IV. Write a paragraph (100 - 150 words) to talk about HOW TO KEEP A HEALTHY LIFE? ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ================================================== ANSWER KEYS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A 11. B 21. C 31. D 41. C 31

2. B 12. D 22. C 32. D 42. A 3. B 13. C 23. D 33. C 43. B 4. B 14. A 24. A 34. A 44. D 5. A 15. D 25. A 35. C 45. B 6. A 16. D 26. A 36. C 46. B 7. D 17. D 27. C 37. A 47. B 8. D 18. B 28. D 38. B 48. A 9. C 19. A 29. C 39. D 49. C 10. B 20. D 30. B 40. C 50. D II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. C 4. A 7. C 10. A 13. A 2. D 5. A 8. D 11. D 14. C 3. B 6. A 9. C 12. B 15. D B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.C 11.D 21.A 31.A 41.C 2.C 12.A 22.D 32.D 42.B 3.A 13.C 23.A 33.A 43.C 4.C 14.C 24.B 34.C 44.A 5.A 15.C 25.C 35.A 45.D 6.B 16.C 26.C 36.C 46.B 7.C 17.C 27.D 37.C 47.A 8.B 18.C 28.B 38.A 48.B 9.D 19.C 29.B 39.D 49.D 10.C 20.D 30.D 40.B 50.C C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. well

6.cough

11. appointment

16. sneezing

2. burn

7. stomachache

12.medical

17.depression

3. temperature

8. hurts

13.unpleasant

18.concentration

4. toothache

9. headache

14. allergic

19.sunburnt

5. pain

10. sickness

15.carefully

20.tiredness

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

32

1. has got

6. wear

2. helps

7. will feel

3. eat

8. to be

4. will have

9. feel

5. helps

10. smile

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. to eat

5. Eating/ are

9. eat/ stay

2. is

6. have

10. have/ should drink

3. will feel

7. have/Have to see

11. will help

4. do not have

8. am

12. will hurt

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

1.grow

2. water

3. helps

4. takes

5. read

6. will harvest

7. will give

8. will take

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. D 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. A 8. A 9. D 10. C 6. B 7. C II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. play → playing/to play 6.and → but 2.interest →interesting 7.more → less 3.wait → are waiting 8.bored → boring 4.have donated → donated 9. spot → spots 5.Did → Have 10. both → and F. READING I. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. l. C

2. A

3. D

4. B

5. D

6. A

7.C

8. B

9. D

10. C

II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word in the box.

1. energy

2. ride

3. calories

4. spend

5. for

6. fit

7. from

8. in

9. exercise

10. tired

33

III. Read the following passage and write T (true) or F (false) for each statement.

1. F

2. F

3. T

4. F

5. F

6. F 7. T 8. T 9. F 10. T IV. Complete the conversation with the phrases in the box. Then answer the questions below.

1. I can’t wait 3. It will cost you 2. I hate to say this 4. With a bit of luck G. WRITING I. Write the conversations for each situation to give advice, using the phrases given.

Then practise them with your partners.

1. A: What’s the matter?

B: I have flu.

A: Poor you! You should be at school. You should stay at home.

2. A: What’s the matter?

B: I have an earache.

A: Poor you! You should go to the doctor. You shouldn’t wait for it to be better.

3. A: What’s the matter?

B: I have a stomachache.

A: Poor you! You should lie down. You shouldn’t eat anything.

4. A: What’s the matter?

B: I have a headache.

A: Poor you! You shouldn’t read any books. You should take a painkiller.

5. A: What’s the matter?

B: I have a sore throat.

A: Poor you! You should take some medicine. You shouldn’t eat any crisps.

II. Make correct sentences from the words and phrases given.

1. We should keep our bodies warm to avoid flu or a cold.

2. Getting enough rest helps you (to) concentrate well at school.

3. Vitamins play an important role in our diet.

4. You should not play more computer games in your free time.

5. The doctor is asking Mai some questions about her health problems.

III. Can you rewrite the following sentences in correct English?

1. Laughing is good for health.

2. Some people have a very bad habit of littering in public.

3. People who live in a dusty area often suffer from diseases.

4. To prevent flu, we should keep our hands clean, our feet warm.

5. She had a sore throat yesterday.

34

IV. Write a paragraph (100 - 150 words) to talk about HOW TO KEEP A HEALTHY LIFE? Health is so undeniably important that everyone wishes to have a healthy life. First of all, it is important to stay physically active. Doing exercises is the best way to keep fit and to prevent some diseases such as heart ailment, high blood pressure, lung disorder and so on.

This also helps build up our muscle and strengthen the immune system. Moreover, a suitable and nutritious eating habit is of great necessity if one wants to stay healthy. In addition, a healthy mind is part of a healthy body. When people are in a good state of mind, they make good decisions for themselves about their jobs, their lifestyle, and their health. It is advisable to reduce stress, make time for things that are fun and get enough sleep every day. Finally, regular health care visit is essential for a healthy life. The practice ensures timely diagnosis and treatment of potential diseases. In conclusion, it requires a combination of practices to maintain good health. =================================================== ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group B. learn C. dear D. clear 1. A. near 2. A. knocked B. needed C. founded D. wanted 3. A. volunteer B. collage C. community D. doctor B. individual C. situation D. children 4. A. provide 5. A. tutor B. student C. university D. discuss 6. A. cough B. laugh C. enough D. high 7. A. collect B. clean C. city D. cracker 8. A. blanket B. donate C. calorie D. allergy 9. A. laugh B. cough C. bought D. tough 10. A. game B. gym C. girl D. bag 11. A. calorie B. labour C. community D. volunteer 12. A. environmental B. benefit C. service D. sick 13. A. danced B. helped C. watched D. enjoyed 14. A. architect B. church C. children D. armchair 15. A. general B. garden C. go D. get 16. A. cancel B. ceiling C. calling D. cupboard 17. A. calories B. carve C. collage D. center 18. A. unique B. mosquito C. mosque D. question 19. A. camping B. recycle C. vacumm D. community 20. A. giant B. target C. figure D. garbage 21. A. chemist B. school C. chance D. chaos 35

22. A. frog 23. A. kite 24. A. volunteer 25. A. chemistry 26. A. architect 27. A. collage 28. A. child 29. A. blanket 30. A. help 31. A. volunteer 32. A. provide 33. A. tutor 34. A. butter 35. A. few 36. A. pretty 37. A. grew 38. A. close 39. A. cough 40. A. are 41. A. reliable 42. A. hate 43. A. bead 44. A. nature 45. A. discipline 46. A. office 47. A. suitable 48. A. however 49. A. wished 50. A. many

B. drag B. cookie B. committee B. chemical B. church B. cave B. provide B. calorie B. benefit B. collage B. individual B. student B. put B. new B. get B. threw B. chose B. laugh B. fair B. living B. play B. read B. change B. vision B. promise B. biscuit B. vehicle B. produced B. parade

C. page C. hike C. guarantee C. charity C. childhood C. cycle C. mind C. donate C. elderly C. community C. situation C. university C. sugar C. threw C. send C. knew C. lose C. enough C. there C. revival C. nation C. dead C. gravity C. cylinder C. service C. guilty C. helicopter C. performed C. great

D. mug D. knit D. degree D. mechanic D. change D. cancel D. think D. allergy D. garden D. doctor D. children D. discuss D. push D. knew D. well D. flew D. rose D. high D. wear D. final D. international D. recede D. basis D. muscle D. expertise D. building D. ahead D. liked D. gravy

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. interview B. wonderful C. benefit D. volunteer 2. A. possible B. conjunction C. recycle D. attention 3. A. service B. project C. protect D. rubbish 4. A. general B. graffiti C. confident D. hospital 5. A. shelter B. blanket C. coupon D. depression 6. A. arcade B. cartoon C. invite D. author 7. A. dishwasher B. athletics C. terrible D. compliment 8. A. uniform B. appointment C. unhappy D. delightful 9. A. entertainment B. celebration C. cafeterial D. championship 10. A. different B. orchestra C. appliance D. favorite 11. A. informal B. provide C. problem D. supply 36

12. A. employment 13. A. engineer 14. A. intelligent 15. A. recycle

B. different B. national B. interest B. protect

C. president C. scientist C. dependent C. instead

D. evident D. figure D. computer D. natural

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. We came to the remote village and meals for homeless children.

A. cook

B. offered

C. do

D. made

2. You should think of the volunteer activities in your community.

A. taking in

B. taking part in

3. Traditional volunteer activities include

C. participating

D. making

money for people in need, cooking and

giving food.

A. rising

B. raising

4. You can help young children by A. doing

B. offering

C. getting

D. taking

them to do homework before or after school.

C. teaching

D. helping

5. Let’s collect and warm clothes to homeless children in our city.

A. give away

B. give back

6. To help people in remote areas, we can

C. take off

D. put on

transportation, such as giving rides

to the elderly.

A. give

B. bring

C. provide

7. Let’s help the sweet children because they have bad A. live

B. living conditions C. ways of life

8. They have decided to ride to work

D. donate .

D. earnings

it is good for their health and the

environment.

A. so

B. but

9. Our school has a programme to

C. although

D. because

children from poor families in Ho Chi Minh

City.

A. ask

B. offer

C. tutor

D. volunteer

10. Americans the tradition of volunteering and helping one another since the early days of the country.

37

B. has had

A. have had

11. Volunteers can do general A. activities

D. to have

such as clean-up projects or home repair.

B. things

12. My brother and I A. have seen

C. had

C. labour

D. jobs

a white tiger already.

B. has seen

C. see

D. are seeing

13.I ____blood twice, and presents to sick ______ children in the hospital recently.

A. donate - give

B. donated — gave

C. have donated - have given

D. have donated - gave

14. Volunteering is special me because I can help others.

A. at

B. for

C. with

15.How many novels Charles Dickens

D. to

?

A. does - write

B. have - written

C. did - written

D. did - write

16.He ate a lot of fried food so he A. get

B. got

fat quickly.

C. gets

17.The Japanese eat a lot of fish and healthy food, A. so

B. because

18. Lan

D. will get they live for a long time.

C. or

D. but

English for more than a year but she can speak it very well.

A. learns

B. learn

C. learned

D. has learned

19. You should watch less TV because looking at screens in a long time A. hurt

B. hurts

20. Go Green

21. Be a Buddy has A. given

B. encourage

C. encouraged

C. provided

D. helped

books for poor children for years.

B. collects

C. is collecting

23. Linh often uses her headphones when she listens to music 38

D. has encouraged

education for street children.

B. spent

A. has collected

loud noise.

D. to hurt

people to recycle rubbish, such as glass, cans and paper.

A. to encourage

22. He

C. is hurting

your eyes.

D. collected her parents don’t like

A. so

B. but

24. Ngoc loves

C. because

outdoors with trees and flowers.

A. to be

B. be

C. being

25. I think 10 years from now more people A. to enjoy

B. will enjoy

26. Volunteers can do general A. activities

A. have seen

D. A & C

going to work by bicycle.

C. enjoying

D. enjoy

such as clean-up project or home repair.

B. things

27. My brother and I

28. I

D. and

C. labour

D. jobs

a white tiger already.

B. has seen

blood twice, and

C. see

D. are seeing

presents to sick children in the hospital recently.

A. donate - give

B. donated - gave

C. have donated - have given

D. have donated - gave

29. He ______newspapers for ten years.

A. is selling

B. sells

30. How many novels A. did - write 31. We

32.

C. has been sold

Charles Dickens

D. has sold

?

B. have - written C. did - written

D. does - write

to Ha Noi several times, but last summer we by train.

A. flew- went

B. has flown – went

C. have flown - have gone

D. have flown - went

She

blood twenty times so far.

A. donates 33. He

B. has donated

C. is donating

lectures to foreign tourists about traditional food and games recently.

A. gives

B. gave

C. have given

34. They have decided to clean up the neighbourhood A. so

B. but

35. “Have you ever A. arrived

D. to donate

D. has given it is full of rubbish.

C. although

D. because

C. seen

D. visited

to Sa Pa? B. been

36. They donated their blood_______ the victims in the accident last week.

A. on 39

B. to

C. for

D. with

37. We want to bring a lot of_______ to our community through volunteer activities.

A. encouragement

B. protection

C. business

D. benefits

38. She wants to support elderly people_______ and without asking for anything.

A. educationally

B. differently

C. willingly

D. environmentally

39. He sometimes donates clothes to the local_______ organisation. It will bring them to people in need.

A. charitable

B. clean

C. friendly

D. skilful

40. We need to find an effective way to_______ traffic jams because they Have increased rapidly for many years.

A. help

B. collect

C. recycle

D. reduce

41. They need some volunteer_______ to help street children by teaching them English.

A. doctors

B.nurses

C. tutors

D. engineers

42. He sometimes visits and brings some presents for elderly people at the_______ A. nursing home B. sports centre

C. post office

D. bus station

43. My mother used some_______ to cover my cuts when I fell down in the garden.

A. shelters

B. coupons

C.murals

D. sticking plasters

44. Mai and her friend_______ a sum of money to the community centre to help disabled children last month.

A. have donated

B. donated C. has donated

D. are donating

45. The teacher_______ his students to hand in their assignments this morning.

A. asked

B. has asked

C. will ask D. is asking

46. We_______ a project to improve the living conditions for homeless people two days ago. They_______ in difficult conditions for a long time.

A. attended/ lived

B. have attended/ lived

C. attended/ have lived

D. have attended/ have lived

47. My mother _______ dinner at home because she _______ to care for my grandma in the hospital last evening.

A. didn't eat/ had 40

B. ate/ had

C. hasn't eaten/ had

D. has eaten/ has

48. He_______ his aunt since he_______ a little child. She_______ to the mountains and_______ as a teacher many years ago.

A. hasn't met/ was/ has gone/ volunteered B. didn't meet/ was/ hasn't gone/ didn't volunteered C. hasn't met/ was/ went/ volunteered D. didn't meet/ wasn't/ worked/ volunteered 49. She_______ public transport to work for ages because it helps to reduce air pollution.

A. hasn't chosen

B. didn't choose

C. chose

D. has chosen

50. I_______ some food and drink for their new charitable centre yesterday. They_______ a lot of cheap meals for the poor for two months.

A. have provided/ have cooked

B. provided/ have cooked

C. provided/ cooked

D. have provided/ cooked

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1.Community ________ have a lot of positive effects on students.

(SERVE)

2. ______________ people find it difficult to have a job.

(DISABLE)

3.I’d like to work as a volunteer for a charity ______________.

(ORGANISE)

4.He made a ÂŁ5000 ______________ to charity.

(DONATE)

5.The Soup Kitchen is a ______________ organization that (PROFIT) provides free meals for needy people.

6.The homeless shelters are entirely staffed by ________ worker.

(VOLUNTEER)

7.The organization is funded by ______________ donations.

(CHARITY)

8.We help the ______________ with housework and gardening.

(OLD)

9.He is_______that he will donate old books to poor children.

(CERTAINTY)

10.They will make a great_______for their community when they

(DIFFER)

open a new school for the street children.

11. She is working for a_______organisation. It provides food and 41

(PROFIT)

drink free forhomeless people.

12. His mother encourages him_______some social activities.

(ATTEND)

13. We called for help from our community to donate food and

(FLOOD)

drink to people in a serious_______town.

14. He finds making pottery______because he isn't clever.

(EASY)

15. She washes her face______, so she rarely has spots.

(REGULAR)

16. The doctor gave her some______on how to lose her weight (ADVISE) effectively.

17. ______can be solved thanks to the support of all the (HOME) community.

18. We can help____people by providing suitable work for them.

(DISABLE)

19. By recycling, we can save _________resources.

(NATURE)

20. The Boy Scouts of America is a youth ______________

(ORGANISE)

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct verb form.

1. I (have)

dinner when his friend called.

2. Joan (travel)

around the world.

3. We (not begin)

to study for the test yet.

4. Don’t get on a bus while it (run) 5. I (invite) come)

.

them to my birthday party yesterday, however, they (not .

6. Look! Somebody (clean)

the room.

7. My brother (begin)

looking for a job in January.

8. Timson (make)

13 films and I think her latest is the best.

9. She (cook) 10. She doesn’t mind (go) 11. I (not see)

42

at the moment. That’s why she can’t answer the phone. out in the evening. him since we (leave)

school.

12. Football (be)

my favourite sport. I like (play)

it in my

free time.

13. Jane (leave)

just a few minutes ago.

14. She (be)

extremely quiet since her husband died.

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. You ever (do) ________ volunteer work?

2. Yes, I (do) __________ volunteer work last month.

3. I ( collect) ________ hundreds of old books and clothes for street children so far.

4. My sister wants to raise funds for street children so she (make) _________ hundreds of postcards to sell them.

5. My hobby is carving eggshells and now I ( carve) __________ nearly 100.

6. Going home from school yesterday, I (help) _____ an old man to go cross the street.

7. Last Tuesday, I (go) _____ home late because there was a traffic jam near my school.

8. At Tet, my mother and her close friends often go to the hospitals to donate cakes, sweets andfor the sick children there. She (do) ________ it for many years.

9. Lan never (eat) _________ Banh tet. She will try some this year.

10.Linh is my close friend. We (know) ________ each other for 5 years.

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

Film maker George Richards (1. be)........................... interested in the cinema since he (2. be)........................... a small child. He (3. make)............................ his first film when he (4. be)......................... just twelve years old. He is now almost forty and he (5. make) ......................... thirty films. George loves travelling. His work (6.take)......................... him all over the world. He (7. be)......................... to Africa, India, Australia, China, the USA and South America. Last year, he (8.visit)......................... Russia for the first time. George is married to the singer Kathy Burke. They (9. be)......................... married for ten years. They live withtheir two children on the Greek island of Kos. They (10. buy)......................... a house on the island in 1987 and they are still living there.

E. CORRECTION 43

I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. They want to provide necessary life skills with street children in their community.

A B C D 2. She has known how to look after sickness children in the right way so far.

C D A B 3. We often volunteer at the nursing home to help elderly in our free time.

A B C D 4. He has attended a green project and planted a lot of trees in their community A B C D two months ago.

5. She had time to play chess with her brother yesterday morning because A B C she cleaned the dirty beach with her green club.

D 6. He has repaired and paints his son's old bicycle for two hours.

A B C D 7. They didn't collected enough books and clothes for their volunteer programme yet.

A B C D 8. They haven’t seen Deach other since September when they have met at Mary's party.

C D A B 9. Peter has bought a new MP3 player yesterday but I haven’t seen it yet.

A B C D 10. The hockey player hit his head on Friday and he was in hospital since then.

A B C D

II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. She has went to visit Susan. She’ll be back tomorrow. ___________ 2. I didn’t done any volunteer work lately. ___________ 3. Matha is a great cooker and she often cooks dinner for homeless ___________ people.

4. Kim hasn’t seen the film already, so don’t tell her how it ends. ___________ ___________ 5. She has donated a lot of money for local charities. ___________ 6. Before donate a book, make sure that it is in good condition.

7. We should encourage people recycle glass, cans, plastic and paper. ___________ ___________ 8. I studied Philosophy for a few years and I think it is a real advantage in life. I’m still learning Philosophy.

9. Look at that man! He can’t stand up because he have drunk too ___________ much champagne.

44

10. It is late! 11.00 pm! By the way darling, I have bought a new dress this morning.

___________

F. READING I. Choose the correct word A, B or C for each gap to complete the following passage.

(1) January 17th, 1995, a powerful earthquake hit the city of Kobe, Japan. Many buildings (2) or collapsed. working together to save their city.

Soon after the earthquake, people in Kobe (3) collapsed buildings. Ordinary people (5) Neighbours pulled each other out (4) out fires even before the fire trucks arrived. Volunteers in Kobe organized themselves into (6) . They worked out a system to send (7) to people who needed. Other teams searched for belongings in damaged stores and homes. Some people (8) food, water, clothes, and electric generators to different part of the city. Some volunteers took (9) of children who had lost their parents. Teams of volunteers from outside Japan helped, too.

Today, Kobe has been built. But people there still remember the outpouring of support they (10)_______ from all over the world back in 1995.

1. A. in B. at C. on D. from 2. A. is burning B. burned C. burning D. burn 3. A. to begin B. are beginning C. begin D. began 4. A. into B. of C. on D. with 5. A. to put B. putting C. puts D. put 6. A. teams B. pair C. group D. friends 7. A. helped B. helping C. help D. to help 8. A. brought B. bringing C. brings D. brought 9. A. part B. care C. caring D. note 10.A. received B. is receiving C. have received D. receiving II. Read the passage, and then choose the best answers.

Each country has many good people who take care of others. For example, some of students in the United States often spend many hours as volunteers in hospitals, orphanages or homes for the elderly. They read books to the people in these places, or they just visit them and play games with them or listen to their problems.

Other young volunteers go and work in the homes of people who are sick or old. They paint, clean up, or repair their houses, do the shopping. For boys who don’t have fathers, there is an organization called Big Brothers. College students and other men take these boys to basketball games or on fishing trips and help them to get to know things those boys usually learn from their fathers.

Each city has a number of clubs where boys and girls can go and play games. Some of these clubs show movies or hold short trip to the mountains, the beaches, museums, or other 45

places of interest. Most of these clubs use a lot of students as volunteers because they are young enough to understand the problems of younger boys and girls.

1. What do volunteers usually do to help those who are sick or old in their homes?

A. They do the shopping, and repair or clean up their house.

B. They tell them stories and sing dance for them.

C. They cool, sew, and wash their clothes.

D. They take them to basketball games.

2. What do they help boys whose fathers do not live with them?

A. To learn things about their fathers.

B. To get to know thing about their fathers.

C. To get to know things that boys want from their fathers.

D. To learn things that boys usually learn from their fathers.

3 .Which activities are NOT available for the students at the clubs?

A. playing games B. learning photography C. going to interest places D. watching films 4. Why do they use many students as volunteers? – Because .

A. they can understand the problems of younger boys and girls.

B. they have a lot of free time.

C. they know how to do the work.

D. they are good at playing games and learning new things.

5. Where don’t students often do volunteer work?

A. hospitals B. orphanages C. clubs D. homes for the elderly III. Read the conversation between the interviewer (I) and the head of the village (HoV), and then choose the correct answers.

I: When did the volunteers come to your village?

HoV: Well, they came last month.

I:How many of them came?

HoV: A group of about twelve.

I: What did they do on the first day?

HoV: They held a meeting with me and some elderly villagers in the first evening to talk about their plans while they were staying in the village.

I: What did they do in the following days?

HoV: They repairedold cottages, taught the children how to have a healthy and clean life.

I: What did the villagers think of them?

HoV: Well, they loved them because they were very helpful, active, and polite.

I: Was there any change in the village after they came?

46

HoV: Yes, a lot. But they should come to help US more next year. I hope so.

I: What do you think of the community service?

HoV: Well, it is very helpful, and it makes US believe in the young generation.

1. The volunteers came to the village .

A. last week B. last month C. last year D. last weekend .

2. On the first day the volunteers had a meeting with A. all the villagers B. all the children C. the head of the village and some of the villagers D. all the children and the head of the village 3. They talked about .

B. having a holiday in the village A. staying in the village C. what they would do D. what they would help the children .

4. The villagers like them because they have A. appearance B. hard working habit C. hard working habit and good behavior D. a healthy and clean life all the time 5. The head of the village thinks that _________ A. the community service is very helpful B. he doesn’t believe in the young generation C. he doesn’t want the volunteers to come back next year D. the community service is not very helpful IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to fill each blank in the following passage.

Hobbies are activities for entertainment. Hobby can cost you almost nothing.

Music is the most popular. For example, many people play the guitar for (1) ____ in their free time. Sports provide other (2) hobbies. Cycling, running, tennis, table-tennis are the sports that millions of people play during their free time.

Some people’s coin collections are wonderful. There are still hundreds of (3) collections, such as bottle collections, seashell collections, butterfly collections, and so on.

For some people, a hobby is a favourite (4) , like chess. In chess, we need two or more people (5) .

1. A. fun B. funny C. funnies D. funniest 2. A. strange B. normal C. favourite D. unusual 3. A. another B. other C. others D. the other 4. A. exercise B. game C. interest D. sports 5. A. play B. to play C. playing D. to playing 47

G. WRITING I. Use the words and phrases to complete sentences.

1. The lakes/ are full/ rubbish. We should/ ask our friends/ clean them this Sunday. ____________________________________________________________ 2. The hurricane/ was terrible. Many houses/ are destroyed/ many people became homeless. __________________________________________________________ 3. They are cold/ hungry. They have/ live/ the street this winter. We should ask people/ help them. __________________________________________________________ 4. We/ can cook meals/ bring them/ homeless people. ____________________________________________________________ 5. We can ask people/ donate warm clothes/ help them/ rebuild their houses. ____________________________________________________________ 6. Yesterday I/ go to school late because I/ miss the bus. ____________________________________________________________ 7. Do you like/ work with children/ or with elderly people? ____________________________________________________________ 8. It’s good/ donate blood because you/ can save people’s lives. ____________________________________________________________ II. Use the cues to make sentences in the present perfect.

1. I/ buy/ a laptop/ but I/ not use/ it. ____________________________________________________________ 2. I/ write/ a blog/ but I/ not upload/ any photos to it. ____________________________________________________________ 3. We/ start/ the game/ half an hour ago/ hut we/ not finish/ it. ____________________________________________________________ 4. My dad/ be/ to London/ but he/ not see/ Big Ben. ____________________________________________________________ 5. I/ read/ my English book/ but I/ not do/ my English homework. ____________________________________________________________ 6. They/ have/ lunch/ but they/ not have/ dinner. ____________________________________________________________ 7. I/ download/ some songs/ but I/ not listen/ to them. ____________________________________________________________ III.Use the cues to make sentences in the present perfect.

48

1. I/ buy/ a laptop/ but I/ not use/ it. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. I/ write/ a blog/ but I/ not upload/ any photos to it. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. We/ start/ the game/ half an hour ago/ but we/ not finish/ it. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4. My dad/ be/ to London/ but he/ not see/ Big Ben. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5.I/ read/ my English book/ but I/ not do/ my English homework. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 6. They/ have/ lunch/ but they/ not have/ dinner. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 7. I/ download/ some songs/ but I/ not listen/ to them. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ IV. Complete the sentences about you.

1. I like to take part in volunteer work because I think ___________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. I think we should help street children in our city because _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. So far I have donated____________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ Las t month I helpe 4. Last month I help ______________________________________________________ 5. I feel more confident after joining a charitable organization because _______________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 6. In order to make our school green and clean, my classmates and I have ____________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 7. One of my classmates comes from a poor family, so I have ______________________ 49

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 8. I decided to volunteer to clean the street up because ___________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 9. I think we can help elderly people by _______________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 10. I believe that volunteers are the happiest people because _______________________ =================================================

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. B 11. D 21. C 31. C 41. B 2. A 12. A 22. C 32. A 42. D 3. C 13. D 23. D 33. D 43. C 4. A 14. A 24. A 34. A 44. C 5. D 15. A 25. C 35. C 45. B 6. D 16. B 26. A 36. A 46. B 50

7. C 17. D 27. C 37. C 47. C 8. B 18. A 28. D 38. C 48. B 9. C 19. B 29. C 39. D 49. C 10. B 20. A 30. D 40. A 50. A II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. D 4. B 7. A 10. C 13. A 2. A 5. D 8. A 11. C 14. B 3. C 6. D 9. D 12. A 15. D B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.A 11.C 21.C 31.D 41.C 2.B 12.A 22.A 32.B 42.A 3.B 13.C 23.C 33.D 43.D 4.D 14.D 24.D 34.D 44.B 5.A 15.D 25.B 35.B 45.B 6.C 16.B 26.A 36.B 46.C 7.B 17.A 27.A 37.D 47.A 8.D 18.D 28.C 38.C 48.C 9.C 19.B 29.D 39.A 49.D 10.A 20.D 30.A 40.D 50.B C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. services 6. voluntary 11. non-profit 16. advice 2. Disabled

7. charitable

12.to attend

17.Homelessness

3. organisation

8. elderly

13.flooded

18.disabled

4. donation

9. certain

14. uneasy

19.natural

5. non-profit

10. difference

15.regularly

20.organization

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct verb form.

1. was having

6. is cleaning

11. haven’t seen- left

2. has travelled

7. began

l2. is playing

3. haven’t begun

8. has made

13. left

4. is running

9. is cooking

14. has been

51

5. invited- didn’t come

10. going

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. Have you ever done...

6. helped

2. did

7. went

3. have collected

8. has done

4. has made

9.has never eaten

5. have carved

10.have known

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

1.has been

2. was

3. made

4. was

5.has made

6. has taken

7. has been

8. visited

9.have been

10. bought

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. C 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. A 8. D 9. A 10. C 6. B 7. A II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. went → gone 6.donate →donating 2.didn’t → haven’t 7.recycle →to recycle 3.cooker → cook 8.studied → have studied 4.already → yet 9. have drunk has drunk 5.for → to 10. have bought - bought

F. READING I. Choose the correct word A, B or C for each gap to complete the following passage. l. C

2.B

3. D

4. B

5. D

6. A

7. C

8. A

9. B

10. A

4. B

5. D

II. Read the passage, and then choose the best answers. l. C 52

2.B

3. D

III. Read the conversation between the interviewer (I) and the head of the village (HoV), and then choose the correct answers. l.B 2.C 3. C 4. C 5. A IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, Cor D to fill each blank in the following passage. l. A

2.C

3. B

4. B

5. B

G. WRITING I. Use the words and phrases to complete sentences.

1. The lakes are full of rubbish. We should ask our friends to clean them this Sunday.

2. The hurricane was terrible. Many houses are destroyed and many people became homeless.

3. They are cold and hungry. They have to live on the street this winter. We should ask people to help them.

4. We can cook meals and bring them to homeless people.

5. We can ask people to donate warm clothes and help them to rebuild their houses 6. Yesterday I went to school late because I missed the bus.

7. Do you like working with children or with elderly people?

8. It’s good to donate blood because you can save people’s lives.

II. Use the cues to make sentences in the present perfect.

1. I have bought a laptop, but I have not used it.

2. I have written a blog, but I have not uploaded any photos to it.

3. We started the game half an hour ago, but we have not finished it.

4. My dad has been to London, but he has not seen Big Ben. 5. I have read my English book, but I have not done my English homework.

6. They have had lunch, but they had not had dinner.

7. I have downloaded some songs, but I have not listened to them.

III. Use the cues to make sentences in the present perfect.

1. I have bought a laptop, but I have not used it.

2. I have written a blog, but I have not uploaded any photos to it.

3. We started the game half an hour ago, but we have not finished it.

4. My dad has been to London, but he has not seen Big Ben. 5. I have read my English book, but I have not done my English homework.

6. They have had lunch, but they have not had dinner.

7. I have downloaded some songs, but I have not listened to them.

IV. Complete the sentences about you.

(Suggested answers) 1. it is very helpful.

53

2. they are in need/ they have a difficult life/ they live in very bad conditions.

3. ten old books and fifty thousand VND. 4. some street children to read and write in evening classes 5. I have done some volunteering work to help other people.

6. collected garbage and put more dust bins.

7. gave him/ her some old clothes, and some notebooks.

8. it is very dirty.

9. cleaning up their houses.

10. they bring happiness to other people/ others. ================================================= ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. collection B. tradition C. exhibition D. question 2. A. version B. pleasure C. usual D. design 3. A. closure B. sure C. pleasure D. leisure 4. A. ocean B. concert C. musician D. official 5. A. so B. expensive C. saxophone D. music 6. A. treasure B. closure C. exposure D. ensure 7. A. happy B. hard C. similarity D. talent 8. A. chorus B. brochure C. machine D. chef 9. A. treasure B. vision C. discussion D. decision 10. A. exhibition B. action C. question D. tradition 11. A. collect B. clean C. city D. cracker 12. A. pottery B. melody C. modal D. profit 13. A. near B. clear C. dear D. learn 14. A. knocked B. needed C. founded D. wanted 15. A. spring B. swimming C. think D. realize 16. A. country B. hungry C. fly D. every 17. A. why B. who C. when D. what 18. A. finished B. reported C. landed D. succeeded 19. A. celebrate B. lazy C. vacation D. mechanic 20. A. conclusion B. ensure C. rush D. mission 21. A. student B. study C. dust D. must 22. A. father B. date C. hard D. last 23. A. chapter B. rich C. cheese D. chemist 24. A. watches B. boxes C. buses D. tables 54

B. sound B. pool B. their B. says B. company B. wicked B. doubt B. gone B. clear B. great B. head B. mistake B. tool B. looks B. played B. heat B. fear B. studio B. thick B. parachute B. hospital B. laugh B. clean B. melody B. clear B. needed

25. A. pleasure 26. A. foot 27. A. birth 28. A. trays 29. A. companion 30. A. naked 31. A. plumber 32. A. clothes 33. A. hear 34. A. heat 35. A. nearest 36. A. sign 37. A. noon 38. A. plays 39. A. decided 40. A. feed 41. A. dear 42. A. stupid 43. A. brother 44. A machine 45. A. doctor 46. A. cough 47. A. collect 48. A. pottery 49. A. near 50. A. knocked

C. same C. moon C. myth C. bays C. comparison C. beloved C. debt C. drove C. swear C. beat C. bread C. triangle C. blood C. wants C. listened C. meat C. hear C. study C. they C. champagne C. pollution C. enough C. city C. modal C. dear C. founded

D. best D. food D. fifth D. days D. compartment D. confused D. herbage D. ghost D. ear D. teach D. health D. drive D. spoon D. helps D. enjoyed D. pleasure D. heart D. student D. that D. cheer D. tomorrow D. high D. cracker D. profit D. learn D. wanted

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. gallery 2. A. fantastic 3. A. necessity 4. A. perform 5. A. national

B. musician C. recently D. excellent B. museum C. colourful D. melodic B. definitely C. traditional D. curriculum B. painting C. concert D. cello B. festival C. saxophone D. violin

6. A. industry 7. A. geography 8. A. patient 9. A. worried 10. A. mathematics 11. A. realize 12. A. important 13. A. general 14. A. comfort 15. A. medical 55

B. tornado B. electronic B. humour B. reserved B. economics B. improve B. especially B. opinion B. nation B. advise

C. natural C. scientific C. deny C. polite C. politics C. possible C. prefer C. abroad C. apply C. vegetables

D. injury D. preparation D. friendly D. arrive D. automatics D. comfortable D. influence D. surprise D. moment D. physical

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. He is very good at drawing_____. He often draws his parents and friends.

A. crayons

B.landmarks

C. galleries

D. portraits

2. She can play some musical_____ such as guitar, piano or cello.

A. instruments

B. paintbrushes

C. opera

D. microphones

3. He_____ as a photographer. He likes ______ photos very much.

A. plays/drawing

B. writes/taking

C. works/taking

D. works/drawing

4. Physical education, music or art are the subjects in the secondary___ in Viet Nam. A. curriculum

B.necessity

C. consideration D. importance

5. Do you know the national ______ of Viet Nam? -Yes. It's Tien Quan Ca. A. composer

B.anthem

C. academic

D. music

6. Some people should take notice of themain contentin the discussion. They just talk about______ things.

A. suitable

B.central

C. unimportant

D. necessary

7. The puppeteers are _____ the puppets by their strings.

A. controlling

B.visiting

C. appearing

D. enjoying

8. She's looking ___ to receiving the letter from her mother.

A. on

B.forward

C. up

D. for

9. Your paintings are _______ his.

A. as beautiful so

B. as beautiful as

C. more beautiful as

D. so beautiful than

10.Her paintbrushes are so old. Hers are ______ yours.

A. as not new as

B. not as new like

C. not as new as

D. not as new than

11. His knowledge of history of art is _________ours.

A. the same as

B. very same as

12. Their kind of music is _____ mine.

56

C. like same as

D. more same as

A. different with

B. so different to

C. as different than

D. different from

13. Some people think the band's rock and roll songs are very lively. They are _______ some of their gentle old songs.

A. the same as

B. different from C. not as far as

D. as much as

14. I love dancing, and my sister loves it, ________.

A. so

B.too

C.neither

D. either

15. He can't play the saxophone, and his brother can't __________ A. either

B.neither

16.No one else in the class plays the guitar A. as well

B. as far as

17.The Brit School is the most famous A. performing 18.Jane is not

B. performance

C. so

.

D. too John.

C. so well as

D. as soon as

arts school in Britain.

C. perform

D. performed

her brother.

A. more intelligent as

B. intelligent as

C. so intelligent as

D. so intelligent that

19.Since the 1970s, the festival in Glastonbury has taken

almost every year and has

grown in size.

A. part 20.He drives as A. careful as

B. place

C. note

D. notice

his father does.

B. more carefully C. the most careful D. carefully as

21.Dong Ho paintings are made on

paper with beautiful

A. traditional – nature

B. tradition - natural

C. tradition – nature

D. traditional - natural

22.I’ll be there A. sooner as 23.My village is not A. the same as 24.The villagers are 57

colors.

I can.

B. no sooner as

C. as soon as

D. soonest as

it was ten years ago.

B. the same to

C. same as

D. the same

they were years ago. There is no change at all.

A. differently from

B. not as friendly as

C. as friend as

D. as friendly as

25.Water puppetry

in the 11th century in the villages of the Red River Delta of North

Viet Nam. A. originated

B. formed

26.The puppet shows present A. city

28.The group is A. well-knows

beautiful B. more - as

C. village

D. rural

her.

C. as - than

D. the - more

for their albums and tours around the world.

B. know-how

29.Going by train isn’t A. so

D. began

themes of Vietnamese villages.

B. urban

27.No one in my class is A. as – as

C. started

C. well-prepared D. well-known

convenient as going by car.

B. as

C. more

30.The performances of puppetry show

D.A & B are correct.

in the countryside and

A. everyday life - folk rock

B. every day life-folk people

C. everyday life - folk tales

D. every day life-folk stories

31.Today, subjects like music and arts are put into the school A. curriculum

B. education

32.Robert does not have

C. school year

in Viet Nam. D. subjects

Peter does.

A. money more than

B. as many money as

C. more money as

D. as much money as

33.For many people, a good knowledge of music and arts is regarded as a student.

A. in needs

B. necessity

34.Last year, Matt earned

C. necessary

D. need

his brother.

A. twice as much as

B. twice as many as

C. twice more than

D. twice as more as

35. Arts are of great A. unimportant 58

_____.

in education, especially for young children.

B. unimportance

for every

C. importantly

D. importance

36. The Brit School is the most famous A. perform

B. performed

arts school in Britain.

C. performing

D. performance

37. This river is _____ that one.

A. as length as

B. the same length as

C. like length

D. as deep as

38. He is _______my father, but he looks young.

A. the same age of

B. as old

C. the same age as

D. so old as

39. Y ou can see many interesting A. paints

B. colours

in that art gallery.

C. portraits

D. paper

40. The ring is ______that one. How much does it cost?

A. as expensive

B. so expensive as

C. as expensive as

D. as expensively as

41. The story is very interesting. I ______ it several times.

A. have read

B. am reading

C. read

D. haven’t read

42. We ______. to New York last summer.

A. flew

B. we’re going to fly

C. we’re flying

D. have flown

43. She always talks in class. ______ A. So is Mai

B. Mai is, too

C. So does Mai

44. I never watch ballet, and my sister doesn’t A. too

B. so

D. Neither is Mai

.

C. either

D. like that

45. Teenagers in Viet Nam like K-pop, and they like Korean films A. too

B. either

C. so

46. Today, subjects like music and arts are put into the school A. school year

B. subjects

C. curriculum

.

D. however in Viet Nam. D. education

47. They are cutting grass in the garden. ______ A. I am, too 59

B. So do I

C. I do either

D. I do neither

48. Arts are of great

in education, especially for young children.

A. important

B. importance

49. Classical music is not A. as exciting

D. unimportance

as pop music.

B. as excited

50. This film is not

C. unimportant

C. exciting

D. more excited

long as the film I watched last week.

A. as

B. but

C. either

D. too

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. He is a famous________. I usually hear some of his wonderful

(MUSIC)

songs when I relax

2. English is one of the______ subjects for students to learn.

(COMPEL)

3. They are really interested in water______ because it is one

(PUPPET)

of the proud traditional arts in Viet Nam.

4. She played the piano and sang this song______. I couldn't stop

(ART)

watching her performance.

5. I want to know where this band________.

(ORIGIN)

6. Avatar is probably the ______________film I’ve ever seen!

(BAD)

7. A dancer must throw her heart and soul into every ________.

(PERFORM)

8. I think Men in Black 1 was as ____ _____as Men in Black 3.

(EXCITE)

9. Although John and Andrew look exactly alike, they act quite (DIFFERENT) ___________.

10. Dong Ho paintings are made with ______________colours.

11. His friends are all

______________

-

they’re

(NATURE)

painters, (ART)

musicians, and writers.

12. He later became a famous jazz _______playing saxophone.

(MUSIC)

13. The problems seemed so small and ______________.

(IMPORTANT)

14. 3. I think that good knowledge of arts and music is a

(NECESSARY)

for anyone.

60

15. The

(PERFORM)

she gave last night wasmarvelous.

16. Water puppetry

(ORIGIN)

in the villages of the

Red River Delta.

17. The DAN BAU is a Vietnamese traditional 18.

(MUSIC)

instrument.

(PHOTOGRAPH)

is the art or taking and processing photographs.

19. I don’t like pop music because it is not as

as

(EXCITE)

rock and roll.

20.

Peter has received a letter of

(INVITE)

to see a water

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. His life (be) 2. I (be)

so boring. He just (watch) late for school yesterday

3. My father (be/ not) 4.

TV every night.

at the office the day before yesterday.

Mr. and Mrs. James (come)

back home and have lunch late last

night?

5. How

you (get)

there?

hard in class, but I (not think)

6. John (study) 7. It (be)

cloudy yesterday.

8. Where

your children (be)

9. The telephone (ring)

he'll pass.

? several times and then (stop)

before I could

answer it.

10. The bank (close)

at four o'clock.

11. The little boy (spend)

hours in his room making his toys.

12. Jamie passed the exam because he (study) 13. My mother (fry)

very hard.

eggs for breakfast every morning.

14. Mozart (have)

more than 600 pieces of music.

15. My father (not watch)

TV last night but I

16.

61

anyone (phone)

yet?

(do).

17. Three people (visit) 18.How many games 19.She (go)

him in hospital last Friday. your team (win)

so far this season?

to Japan but now she (not/ come)

20. They (visit)

back.

a farm two weeks ago.

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct verb form.

Kevin O’Donnell works in Hollywood. He records sound for films. He (1. work) on his first film in 1980: Star Wars. He’s now 51 and he (2. help) more than 100 films. In 1983, he (3. do) of Endearment. The film (4. win) one. He (6. be) Now, he (7. be)

to

make

the sound on the film called Terms five Oscars, but O’Donnell (5. not win)

at the Oscars in 1983 when he was only 26. to the Oscars 20 times. He has worked on Top

Gun,Terminator 3, Spider-Man, Transformers and other great films, but he (8. not win) an Oscar yet. He (9. write) 20 speeches so far, but (10. never given)

one. The

speeches are in a drawer in his house. Kevin doesn’t mind. He knows the sound in his films is amazing. He’s going to win - one day!

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. She's interested in photographs because she wants to take a lot of beautiful photos of life.

A B C D 2. The band would like to share their interest in music to their fans by singing good A B C D songs in their concert.

3. Water puppetry is one of the unique and traditional artist forms in Viet Nam. A B C D 4. She thinks her younger brother plays the piano as good as she does.

A B C D 5. Some people say that the melody of classical music isn't more quick as hip-hop.

62

D A B C 6. My hobby isn't quite different with your hobby, so I think we can become close friends.

A B C D 7. She doesn't like going to cinema, and her sister doesn't too.

D A B C 8. I think your idea is quite different as mine.

A B C D 9. Uncle Jimmy came to stay with us last month; it is very nice life.

C D A B 10. I have travelled a lot, but I have never been in the USA. C D A B II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. A lot of people are good artists and they are successfully in life. ___________ 2. Music promote creativity, social development, and personality. ___________ 3. The Mona Lisa is a portrait paint by the Italian artist Leonardo da ___________ Vinci.

4. Your violin is the same with the one I’ve just bought. ___________ 5. My mother doesn’t like rock music and I don’t too. ___________ 6. The weather of Hong Kong is different from that of Canada’s. ___________ ___________ 7. How long do you go to the movies? - Twice a month.

8. The weather today is not so hot as it is yesterday. ___________ 9. They kept me in the dark. I didn’t knew anything about that robbery. ___________ ___________ 10.Yesterday class 2B has gone to the National Library.

F. READING I. Fill in the blank with a suitable word.

Hollywood. He records (2) for films. He Kevin O’Donnell works (1) worked on his first film in 1980: Star Wars. He’s now 51 and he (3)_____helped to make more than 100 films. In 1983, he did the sound on the film called Terms of Endearment. The win one. He was at the Oscars in film won five Oscars, but O’Donnell (4) 1983 (5) he was only 26.

Now, he has (6) to the Oscars 20 times. He worked on Top Gun, Terminator 3, Spider-Man, Transformers and other great films, but he hasn’t won an Oscar (7) . He has written 20 speeches so far, but has never been given one. (8) speeches are in a drawer in (9) house. Kevin doesn’t mind. He knows the sound in his films is amazing. He’s (10) to win one day!

II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word in the box. however leaving

63

made wrote

best lived

was in

much the

written in England in 1719.

One of the first novels in the history of literature (1) It was Robinson Crusoe by Daniel Defoe. Daniel Defoe was born (2) London in the family of a rich man. When Daniel was a schoolboy, be began to write stories. After (3) school, he worked in his father’s shop and (4) articles for newspapers. Defoe visited many countries and met many people. That helped him (5) in his writings.

In 1719, when Defoe was sixty years old, he wrote the novel Robinson Crusoe which (6) _________ him famous. Defoe used in his book a true story about a sailor who (7)__________ on an island for four years. Robinson Crusoe in Defoes novel lived on an novel in England and in island for twenty-eight years. People liked (8) many other countries, Daniel Defoe wrote other books. (9) , his novel Robison famous. Defoe was not a rich man when he died in 1731.

Crusoe was the (10) III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

Have you ever seen the film School of Rock? It’s about a rock musician who became a teacher. The film is based on a real music school which is run by Paul Green. Paul Green started the first School of Rock in 1998 in Philadelphia in the USA. He gave students rock music lessons after school, but he wanted to do more. Now he gives them the chance to play in rock concerts. “Some of our students have never played in front of a real audience before. We teach them how to do it.” he says. He has already taught hundreds of young people to be rock performers, and now there are 30 schools of rock in different towns in the USA. 1. How many students has he taught? _________________________________________________________ 2. How many schools of rock are there in the USA? _________________________________________________________ 3. When did Paul Green start his first rock school? _________________________________________________________ 4. What is the film School of Rock about? _________________________________________________________ 5. What does he teach his students to do? _________________________________________________________ IV. Read the text about an artist. Choose the correct answer: A, B, or C. You can’t buy a drawing by Julian Beever and you can’t see his work in a gallery or museum. Julian makes his amazing pictures on the pavements of city streets. People have called him “the Pavement Picasso” and perhaps you have seen his pictures on the Internet.

Julian has made hundreds of pieces of “pavement art” in different countries - in many parts of Europe and also in the USA, Australia, Japan, Argentina, and Brazil.

His drawings can take three or four days to finish. But because he draws with chalk, the drawings only stay for a short time. When people walk on them or when it rains, they 64

quickly disappear. For Julian, this isn’t a problem. The drawings survive in the photos he has taken, and this is the most important thing for him.

Julian’s fame hasn’t come from experts in the art world, but from the Internet. “The reason why my work has become well known is because people like it and they’ve sent it to each other on the Internet,” he says. “So I know that what I do is popular.”

Julian Beever is from Leicestershire in England, but he now lives in Belgium. .

1. Julian Beever makes drawings A. outside B. on his computer C. for exhibitions in a gallery 2. He has worked .

A. in a few cities B. in lots of countries C. with hundreds of people 3. His pictures .

C. don’t stay for a long time A. are easy to draw B. look good when it rains 4. Lots of people know Julian’s art because .

A. they know a lot about art B. he has sent photos to them C. they have seen it on the net 5. Julian Beever .

A. hasn’t lived in Britain B. hasn’t tried to be a star in the art world C. isn’t very interested in photos G. WRITING I. Complete sentences with too or either.

1. We often go to the library on Sunday afternoon, they .......................................

2. Susan can speak Japanese, Tom .........................................................................

3. Minh didn't see the train, Nga ............................................................................

4. Hoa will fly to Hong Kong next month, and her mother ...................................

5. The pineapples aren’t ripe. And the durians .....................................................

6. March is hot, and May ......................................................................................

7. The boys shouldn’t smoke cigarettes and the girls ............................................

8. I don’t know how to use a computer and my friends .........................................

9. She likes eggs, and her brothers ........................................................................

10. They stayed at home last night, and their children ..........................................

II. Combine the sentences. Use the words in brackets.

1. Mr. Pike teaches history of arts. Mrs May teaches history of music. SAME SUBJECT _________________________________________________________ 2. This bike is 800,000 VND. That bike is 600,000 VND (PRICE ... DIFFERENT) _________________________________________________________ 65

3. Linda didn’t go to the concert show last night. Susan didn’t go to the concert show last night. (EITHER) _________________________________________________________ 4. Classical music is interesting. Folk music is interesting. (AS ... AS) _________________________________________________________ 5. Mr. Owen speaks English. Mrs. Phan speaks English. (SAME LANGUAGE) III. Complete each sentence so that it means the same as the sentence above.

1. This room is larger than the one at the end of the corridor of the art gallery.

The room at the end of the corridor of the art gallery is not ________________________ .

2. I think action films are more exciting than romance films.

In my opinion, romance films are not _________________________________________ .

3. Salvador Dali’s paintings are different from Picasso’s paintings.

Picasso’s paintings are not _________________________________________________ .

4. I am interested in comic books, and my brother is also interested in comic books.

I am interested in comic books, and my brother is _______________________________ .

5. My mother doesn’t like thrillers. I don’t like them.

My mother doesn’t like thrillers, and I don’t ___________________________________ .

6. She takes photographs and collects coins as hobbies.

Her hobbies are _________________________________________________________ .

7. “Chèo” or “Cải lương” are considered some kinds of traditional opera in Viet Nam. Viet Nam has some kinds of ________________________________________________ .

8. My sister sings better than me.

I don’t sing _____________________________________________________________ .

9. Ballets and modern dance are quite different.

Ballets and modern dance are not ___________________________________________ .

10. The project was shorter than we thought at first.

The project was not as _____________________________________________________ .

IV. Write a letter to invite a friend to a circus, using the following cues.

Dear Nam 1. I/ happy/ hear/ that/ you/ your family/ well. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 2. You/ remember/ circus/ we/ see/ last year? ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 3. Circus/ coming/ again/ our city. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 66

4. My father/ tickets/ circus. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 5. We/ you/ go/ us. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 6. You/ free/ this weekend? ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 7. We/ meet/ 7 pm/ outside/ theatre. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 8. Show/ begin/ 7.30 pm. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 9. I/ hope/ we/ good time/ together. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 10. I/ look forward/ see/ you/ there. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ Have a good day!

Regards,Tuan ===================================================

67

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. D 11. C 21. A 31. D 41. D 2. D 12. B 22. B 32. B 42. C 3. B 13. D 23. D 33. C 43. B 4. B 14. A 24. D 34. B 44. D 5. D 15. D 25. A 35. A 45. C 6. D 16. C 26. A 36. B 46. D 7. B 17. B 27. B 37. C 47. C 8. A 18. A 28. B 38. A 48. C 9. C 19. D 29. B 39. A 49. D 10. C 20. A 30. D 40. D 50. A II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. B 4. A 7. B 10. C 13. A 2. C 5. D 8. C 11. B 14. C 68

3. B

6. B

9. A

12. D

15. B

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.D 11.A 21.D 31.A 41.A 2.A 12.D 22.C 32.D 42.A 3.C 13.B 23.A 33.D 43.C 4.A 14.B 24.D 34.A 44.C 5.B 15.A 25.A 35.D 45.A 6.C 16.C 26.D 36.C 46.C 7.A 17.A 27.A 37.B 47.A 8.B 18.C 28.D 38.C 48.B 9.B 19.B 29.D 39.C 49.A 10.C 20.D 30.C 40.C 50.A C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. musician

6. worst

11. artistic

16. originated

2. compulsory

7. performance

12. musician

17. musical

3. puppetry

8. exciting

13. unimportant

18. photography

4. artistically

9. differently

14. necessity

19. excited

5. originated

10. natural

15. performance

20. invitation

D. VERB FORMS I. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. is- watches

11.has spent

2. was

12.studied

3. was not

13. fries

4. Did…come back

14. has

5. did you get

15. didn’t watch-did

6. is studying- don’t think

16. Has.. phoned

7. was

17. visited

8. are

18. have.. won

69

9. rang- stopped

19. has gone- hasn’t come

10. closed

20.visited

II. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct verb form.

1. worked

6. was

2. has helped

7. has been

3. did

8. hasn’t won

4. won

9. has written

5. didn’t win

10.have never been given

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. B 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. D 8. D 9. C 10. D 6. A 7. D II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. successfully → successful 6. Canada’s → Canada 2. promote →promotes 7.How long → How often 3. paint →painting 8. is → was 4. with → as 9. didn’t knew→ didn’t know 5. too → either 10.has gone →went F. READING I. Fill in the blank with a suitable word.

1. in

2. sound

3. has

4. didn’t

5. when

6. been

7. yet

8. The

9. his

10. going

II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word in the box. l. was

2. in

3. leaving

4. wrote

5. much

6. made

7. lived

8. the

9. However

10. most

III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions.

1. He has already taught hundreds of young people.

2. There are over 30 schools of rock in different towns in the USA. 3. He started the first School of Rockin 1998.

4. It’s about a rock musician who became a teacher.

5. He teaches them to be rock performers.

IV. Read the text about an artist. Choose the correct answer: A, B, or C. 70

1. A

2. B

3. C

4.C

5. B

G. WRITING I. Complete sentences with too or either.

1. they do, too.

2. Tom can, too.

3. Nga didn’t, either.

4. her mother will, too.

5. the durians aren’t, either.

6. May is, too.

7. the girls shouldn’t, either.

8. my friends don’t, either.

9. her brothers do, too.

10. their children did, too.

II. Combine the sentences. Use the words in brackets.

1. Mr. Pike teaches history of arts and Mrs. May teaches the same subject.

2. The price of this bike is different from that bike.

3. Linda didn’t go to the concert show last night and Susan didn’t, either 4. Classical music is as interesting as folk music.

5. Mr. Owen speaks English and Mrs. Phan speaks the same language.

III. Complete each sentence so that it means the same as the sentence above.

1. The room at the end of the corridor of the art gallery is not as large as this room.

2. In my opinion, romance films are not as exciting as action films.

3. Picasso’s paintings are not the same as Salvador Dali’s paintings.

4. I am interested in comic books, and my brother is interested in comic books too.

5. My mother doesn’t like thrillers, and I don’t either.

6. Her hobbies are taking photographs and collecting coins.

7. Viet Nam has some kinds of traditional opera, such as “Chèo” or “Cải lương”.

8. I don’t sing as well as my sister.

9. Ballets and modern dance are not the same.

10. The project was not as long as we thought at first.

IV. Write a letter to invite a friend to a circus, using the following cues.

1. I am happy to hear that you and your family are well.

2. Did you remember the circus (that) we saw last year?

3. The circus is coming again to our city.

4. My father has bought the tickets for the circus.

5. We would like you to go with us.

6. Are you free this weekend?

7. We will meet you at 7 pm outside the theatre.

8. The show begins at 7.30 pm.

9. I hope we will have a good time together.

10. I look forward to seeing you there/ I am looking forward to seeing you there. =================================================== 71

ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. wash B. warm C. wall D. walk 2. A. pan B. bag C. water D. add 3. A. sauce B. aunt C. caught D. daughter B. naughty C. audience D. water 4. A. document 5. A. one B. bottle C. coffee D. pot B. what C. problem D. yogurt 6. A. morning 7. A. talk B. salt C. sausage D. cause 8. A. pork B. flower C. cow D. flour 9. A. noodle B. food C. soon D. cook B. fragrant C. fragile D. traffic 10. A. apple 11. A. bitter B. delicious C. diet D. music 12. A. pepper B. vegetarian C. shelter D. pen 13. A. food B. tooth C. noodles D. flood 14. A. sunburn B. tuna C. tutor D. unusual 15. A. warm B. wash C. wall D. walk 16. A. pan B. bag C. wash D. add 17. A. sauce B. daughter C. caught D. aunt 18.

A. monthly A. notebook 20. A. cupboards 21. A. windows 22. A. climb 19.

23. A. butter 24. A. great 25. A. weight 26. A. too 27. A. would 28. A. enough 29. A. few 30. A. chooses 31. A. suit 32. A. accurate 33. A. lazy 34. A. while 35. A. come 36. A. blood 37. A. hour 72

B. homework B. borrow B. chopsticks B. tables B. busy

C. closer D. poem C. other D. follow C. tourists D. laptops C. apartments D. pictures C. because

B. put B. bread B. height B. food B. about B. cough B. sew B. houses B. seven B. accept B. lapel B. which B. roll B. prove B. honest

C. sugar C. break C. eight C. soon C. round C. though C. knew C. rises C. sugar C. accident C. label C. who C. comb C. rude C. heir

D. biscuit

D. push D. steak D. vein D. good D. out D. rough D. new D. horses D. sun D. success D. labourer D. white D. grow D. souvenir D. hospital

B. dreamt C. heal D. jealous 38. A. dealt 39. A. post B. close C. police D. phone B. union C. usage D. university 40. A. umbrella 41. A. taught B. cause C. laugh D. audience 42. A. world B. morning C. short D. fork B. warm C. farm D. carp 43. A. bargain 44. A. warm B. wash C. wall D. walk 45. A. pan B. bag C. wash D. add B. opera C. hot D. bottle 46. A. tofu 47. A. taught B. water C. sandwich D. author B. pancake C. snack D. salt 48. A. apple 49. A. torch B. pot C. omelette D. rock 50. A. vacation B. nation C. question D. exhibition II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. noodles B. dinner C. alone D. bitter 2. A. mineral B. lemonade C. turmeric D. popular B. spinach C. fragrant D. instead 3. A. pancake 4. A. tablespoon B. together C. banana D. variety 5. A. enough B. boneless C. pepper D. sandwich 6. A. Vietnamese B. equipment C. understand D. volunteer B. diversity C. dishonest D. difference 7. A. employment 8. A. acceptable B. acquaintance C. friendliness D. suspicious 9. A. education B. disciplines C. influences D. customers B. applicants C. admissions D. financial 10. A. requirements 11. A. dangerous B. endangered C. pollution D. extinction B. beautiful C. suitable D. natural 12. A. achievement 13. A. excitement B. impression C. government D. production 14. A. environmental B. organization C. international D. communication 15. A. offer B. deny C. delay D. apply B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Can you tell me this dish?

A. to cook 2. What A. food

B. how to cook

73

D. how to cooking

do I need to cook an omelette?

B. material

3. In Viet Nam, spring rolls are served A. most

C. cooking

B. almost

C. menu

D. ingredients

___at a family gathering or anniversary dinner.

C. mostly

D. most of

4. “What is your A. favourite 5. How many A. orange

dish for breakfast?” - “It’s beef noodle soup.”

B. most

B. milk

B. from

7. Lan’s brother is a A. cooker 8. What

D. liking

do you eat every day?

6. Cakes in Viet Nam are made A. in

C. best

C. apple

D. apples

butter, eggs, and flour.

C. of

D. by

, working at the Metropolitan Restaurant.

B. cooking

C. chief

D. chef

drink do you like most?

A. nation 9. “Do you want to A. like

B. foreign

C. foreigner

D. favourite

this new dish of noodle I have just cooked?”

B.try

C. drink

D. make

10. The eel soup that your father has just cooked tastes very A. well 11.There isn’t A. some left 12.A

B. any leaning

C. some leaving

D. any left

B. fast food

C. breakfast

D. lunch

B. Fast food

C. Sandwiches

D. Hamburgers

B. How much

C. How many

D. What

____ tomatoes do you need to make the sauce?

A. How much

16.There isn’t A. any left 17.A

B. How many

C. How long

D. How often

for dinner, so I have to go to the market.

B. any leaving

C. some leaving

D. some left

is a small meal that you eat when you are in a hurry.

A. snack

18.

for dinner, so I have to go to the market.

water should I put into the glass?

A. How

15.

D. delicious

is hot food that is quick to cook, and is served very quickly in a restaurant.

A. Hot food

14.

C. healthy

is a small meal that you eat when you are in a hurry.

A. snack

13.

B. best

.

B. fast food

C. breakfast

D. lunch

is hot food that is quick to cook, and is served very quickly in a restaurant.

74

A. Hot food 19.

B. Fast food

B. How much

C. How many

D. What

tomatoes do you need to make the sauce?

A. How much

21.

D. Roasted duck

water should I put into the glass?

A. How

20.

C. Sandwiches

B. How long

C. How many

D. How often

bottles of milk does your family need for a week?

A. How much

22.How many

B. How many

C. How

D. How often

do you want?

A. orange juice

B. bottle of orange juice

C. jar of orange juice

D. cartons of orange juice

23.Is there any butter A. leave

in the refrigerator?

B. to leave

C. leaving

24.There is tofu, but there aren’t A. some-some 25.How many

D. left

sandwiches.

B. any-any

C. some-any

D. any-some

do you need?

A. cartons of yogurt

B. packet of yogurt

C. carton of yogurt

D. yogurt

26.Can you tell me this dish?

A. to cook 27.What A. food

B. how to cook

C. cooking

D. how to cooking

do I need to cook an omelette?

B. material

C. menu

28.In Viet Nam, spring rolls are served

D. ingredients

at a family gathering or anniversary

dinner.

A. most 29.“What is your A. favourite 30.How many A. orange

B. almost

D. mostly

dish for breakfast? - “It’s beef noodle soup” B. most

C. best

D. liking

do you eat every day?

B. milk

31.Cakes in Viet Nam are made 75

C. most of

C. apple butter, eggs, and flour.

D. apples

A. in

B. from

32. Lan’s brother is a A. cooker 33. What is your A. nation 34.

“Do you want to A. like

C. of

D. by

working at Metropolitan Restaurant.

B. cooking

C. chief

D. chef

C. foreigner

D. favourite

drink?

B. foreign

this new dish of noodle I have just cooked?”

B. drink

C.try

D. make

35. We need a kilo of fish and _____ pork.

A. much

B. any

C. many

D. some

36. My mother often cooks______ for my breakfast. It is made by frying eggs.

A. eel soup

B. shrimp

C. omelette

D. turmeric

37. Before taking spring rolls into a pan, you should____ it and____ some cooking oil.

A. add/pour

B. heat/add

C.add/heat

D. pour/add

38. Her favourite food is_____. It is a kind of the ocean fish.

A. tuna

B. sausage

C. ham

D. sauce

39. She'd like to eat pork_____ at lunch. Her mother cooks it very well.

A. cheese

B. broth

C. tofu

D. spinach

40. He often buys_____ meat when he goes to the supermarket.

A. lively

B. cooking

C.easy

D. boneless

41. You should cut the beef_____ small slices and add some salt and pepper.

A. in

B. from

C. with

D. into

42. You can add a half_____ of sugar into the mixture of flour and chocolate.

A. box

B. carton

C.glass

D. teaspoon

43. There are some_____ in this soup such as potatoes, beef, pepper, etc.

A. dishes

B. ingredients

C. information

D. pinches

44. He bought a half_____ of pork at the supermarket yesterday.

A. carton

B. tablespoon

C. kilo

D. bottle

45. _____some spinach in the fridge. We can use it to make soup for our dinner.

A. There are 76

B. There aren't

C. There is

D. There isn't

46. We need_____ to make a bowl of salads.

A. some vegetables

B. vegetable

C. some vegetable

D. any vegetables

47. There_____ chicken in the fridge. You should buy it now because she's ready to cook chicken soup for dinner.

A. aren't any

B. isn't some

C. isn't any

D. aren't some

48. I feel hungry now, but there_____ pancakes left.

A. aren't some

B. isn't any

C. isn't some

D. aren't any

49. _____sausages are there in your lunchbox? - One. A. How many

B. How much

C. How often

D. How long

50. _____flour do you want to make this cake? - 300 grams.

A. How long

B. How many

C. How much

D. How far

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. There aren’t any vegetables and fruits ____. We should go to the

(LEAVE)

supermarket and buy them

2. It was so_____ when I tried eating sticky rice at the first time.

(TASTE)

3. My Grandma is cooking sweet soup_____, so I can't wait to (FRAGRANT) enjoy it.

4. Viet Nam cuisine has a___ of unique foods from different areas.

(VARIABLE)

5. I like Pho very much. Its broth is made by_____ chicken bones

(STEW)

or bones of cows

6. The soup had a very __________ taste.

(SALT)

7. She covered the cake with a _____________ of sugar and whites

(MIX)

of eggs.

8. Most children enjoy eating ________ chicken and French fries.

(FRY)

9. The pineapple was sweet and ______________.

(JUICE)

10. Meats and fish are ______________ used in all Vietnamese

(COMMON)

77

cooking.

11. The chicken meat is ______________ and cut into thin slices.

(BONE)

12. It took about 30 minutes of ________ and 40 minutes of baking. (PREPARE) 13. The sauce itself was ____________ and slightly sweet.

(FRAGRANCE)

14. Van Cao was a famous Vietnamese ______________.

(COMPOSE)

15. The ____________of Tu Duc Tomb was completed in 1876.

(CONSTRUCT)

16. The chicken meat served with pho ga is ______________and (BONE) cut into thin slices.

17. The students were ________prepared for the national exams.

(CARE)

18. He is so clever and well ______________.

(EDUCATE)

19. Dong Ho ______________are made in Dong Ho village.

(PAINT)

20. The ______________of pho spread southwards in the 1950’s.

(POPULAR)

D. VERB FORMS I. Supply the correct verb forms 1. I (not be)_______ hungry .I(not want)____________ any rice.

2. Wait! Miss Mai (have) __________________breakfast.

3. _________(be) there any oranges ?- Yes there (be)___________ one.

4. ______________your sister (like )________________ lemonade ?

5. My mother (cook)______________ in the kitchen at the moment. She like (cook)______________very much .

6. They are tired and they'd like (have)_______________ a rest .

7. __________you (write) _______________the essay yet?

-Yes, I ( write)____________it yesterday.

8. Minh 's sister ( fly) ________________to Da Nang tomorrow.

II. Use the past simple tense to complete the sentences.

1. I (visit) _________my grandparents yesterday.

2. She (buy)_____________ a lot of souvenirs last summer vacation.

3. My mother (give)__________ me a yellow cap.

78

4. They (arrive)____________ at the airport at eight o'clock this morning.

5. I (speak) ____________to her about my vacation.

6. Mr. Quang (teach) _____________mathematics for many years.

7. I (see) __________you at the party last night.

8. The children (be) ________very happy on their trip to Nha Trang.

9. Minh (put)________ the cake on the table.

10. They (live)________ here two years ago.

III. Supply the correct verb form.

1. How many subjects

you (learn)

last year?

2. Wait for me a minute. I (have) 3.

breakfast.

(be)there any butter in the refrigerator?

4. This is the most delicious dish I (ever/ eat) 5. Noodle (be)

.

very popular in all regions of Vietnam.

6. How much money

you (save)

7. Last week, my dad (buy)

last year?

a lot of candy for my birthday party.

8. This morning my dad (not/drink) 9. How many bottles of oil 10. I (never/ enjoy)

tea as usual.

your family (need)

in a month?

Bun Bo Hue before.

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. She added some cooking oil into the frying pan, and then put the mixtures of eggs into it.

A B C D 2. The noodles in a bowl of bun bo are done from the most delicious rice.

A B C D 3. They shouldn't put a pinch and sugar more because the mixture of cakes is so sweet now.

A B

C

D

4. There are some potato and beef in the kitchen now, so we can cook soup from them.

A B C D 5. There isn't some fresh milk in the glass bottle, so she thinks someone has drunk it all.

A B C D 6. How many banana did you buy. Mom? - Three, my dear.

79

D A B C 7. How many pork does your mother decide to cook this food? - A kilo.

C D A B 8. The chef always cooks eel soup very well, and we can't forget its specially taste A B C D 9. He likes taking photos and singing very much, and his brother doesn't like them A B C D 10. The gardens are looking after the trees and flowers very carefully.

D A B C

II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. How many orange juice have you had today? ___________ 2. Are there some eggs in the fridge? ___________ 3. Would you like a cheese with your pasta? ___________ 4. Salt is one of important ingredient for almost dishes. ___________ 5. Can you buy some breads on your way home? ___________ 6. What do you usually have in breakfast? ___________ 7. Vietnamese eat more instant noodles to Japanese. ___________ 8. How many glass of water should you drink per day? ___________ 9. The song isn't as boring so she thought, and she really likes it. ___________ 10. He wasn't at home yesterday morning because he saw in the park ___________ yesterday.

F. READING I. Read the texts and complete the chart.

I’m Roy and this is my wife, Joan. We live on a farm, so we have to get up early, at about 5.30. We start a day at 6 a.m with a big breakfast- bacon, sausages, eggs, tomatoes and mushrooms. We have toast, too, and two or three cups of tea.

Our big meal of the day is lunch at 12 o’clock. We have meat with potatoes and vegetables, then a big pudding, such as apple pie and custard, and a cup of tea.

At five o’clock we have tea. That’s a light meal- eggs perhaps, or cheese on toast, and then cakes or biscuits and another cup of tea. On Fridays and Saturdays we go to the pub in the evenings and we have a few pints of beer.

80

Meals

When

What

1. Breakfast ................ ..................................... ....................................

2. ................................. ..................................... ....................................

3. ................................. ..................................... ....................................

II. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the following passage are mixed

special introduction

kinds dish

for easy

when dried

This (1) is called Nem Ran by northerners and Cha Gio by southerners. In of Nem Ran dates back to a time (3) Cha Ca had not Ha Noi, the (2) existed. Although it ranks among Vietnam’s specialty dishes, Nem Ran is very (4) to prepare. Consequently, it has long been a preferred food on (5) occasions such as Tet and other family festivities.

Ingredients used (6) Nem Ran comprise of lean minced pork, see crabs or unshelled shrimps, two kinds of edible mushroom (Nam Huong andMocNhi), (7) onion, duck eggs, pepper, salt and different (8) of seasoning. All are (9) thoroughly before being wrapped with transparent rice paper into small rolls. These rolls (10) then fried in boiling oil.

III. Read the passage and decide which answer A, B, C or D best fits each space.

The 25th meeting of the FAO Committee on Fisheries (COFI) that will take place in February 2003 comes at a (1) time in the quest for sustainable fisheries. Meeting in Johannesburg at the World Summit on Sustainable Development in 2002, world leaders (2) the vital role of marine fisheries to economic and food security and to biodiversity in general. Leaders established a number of fisheries commitments for the world community, (3) a call “to maintain or restore stocks to levels that can produce maximum sustainable (4) with the aim of achieving these goals for depleted stocks on an urgent basis and where possible not later than 2015.�

The mission of FAO in the field of fisheries is to (5) and secure the long-term sustainable development and utilization of the worlds fisheries and aquaculture. Many of the issues (6) the agenda for the 2003 COFI meeting will contribute directly to the goal of restoring depleted fish stocks and to (7) other commitments.

If we are to fulfill these commitments, we must take (8) actions and set clear priorities. The most recent FAO statistics indicate that over 70 percent of fisheries are (9) overfished or are fished at their maximum capacity. In coming years, production from many key fisheries will likely decline. Demand for fisheries products, (10) , will 81

continue to increase. The prospect of this growing shortfall poses our greatest fisheries challenge today.

1. A. busy B. critical C. serious D. fine 2. A. declared B. claimed C. accepted D. acknowledged 3. A. giving B. making C. including D. containing 4. A. volume B. quantity C. amount D. yield 5. A.aid B. meet C. provide D. facilitate 6. A. on B with C. in D. for 7. A. advancement B. advancing C. advanced D. advance 8. A. determined B. concentrated C. concerted D. focused 9. A. both B. or C. either D. neither 10. A. however B. consequently C. so D. therefore IV. Read the passage carefully, and then do the following tasks.

The healthy eating diet Healthy eating is about feeling great and having more energy. If you choose the right foods, your healthy diet will be a tasty diet, too. You can still enjoy your favourite sweet and salty foods, but too much sugar and salt is bad for your body.

Dairy products like milk, cheese, and yoghurt are great because they contain calcium and keep your teeth and bones healthy. You should choose low-fat dairy products.

Meat, fish, eggs, beans, and nuts are important, too. They keep our bodies healthy and they give us energy to work and play.

Whole grains are an important part of every meal. If you eat lots of whole grains, you will have a healthy heart. Whole grains are in bread, cereal, pasta, and rice. Dark bread and brown rice are great sources of whole grains.

Fruit and vegetables are the most important part of a healthy diet. They are low in calories and full of vitamins. Eat lots of fruit and vegetables with every meal, and as snacks during the day. Fruit and vegetables with darker colours have more vitamins.

A. Find the underlined words in the text to match the meanings.

1. ________ : an amount of energy.

2. ________ : the power that your body gets from food.

3. ________ : food that you eat between meals.

4. ________ : If food is this, it tastes of sugar.

5. ________ : If food is this, it tastes of salt.

6. ________ : the types of food that you eat most often.

7. ________ : things in food that we need to grow and be healthy.

8. ________ : the place where you get something from.

B. Answer the following questions.

1. What does the healthy eating diet help you?

82

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. What can you also enjoy when you have a healthy eating diet? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Why are dairy products good for your health? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4. What is the function of meat, fish, eggs, beans and nuts? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5. Why are whole grains an important part of every meal? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 6. What types of foods can we get whole grains from? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 7. Why are fruit and vegetables the most important part of a healthy diet? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 8. What types of fruit and vegetables have more vitamins?

G. WRITING I. Choose the sentence that has the same meaning as the first.

1. Somebody might have stolen your car.

A. Your car might have been stolen.

B. Somebody might have been stolen your car.

C. Your car might be stolen.

D. Your car might have be stolen by somebody.

2. They think that the owner of the house has gone abroad.

A. The owner of the house is thought to go abroad.

B. The owner of the house is thought to have been going abroad.

C. The owner of the house is thought to have been gone abroad.

D. The owner of the house is thought to have gone abroad.

3. She started work three months ago.

A. She had been working for three months.

B. It is three months since she started work.

C. She is working here for three months now.

83

D. It’s three months that she worked for.

4. My career as a teacher began 14 years ago.

A. I have started teaching for 14 years now.

B. For 14 years have I been a teacher.

C. I was a teacher for 14 years.

D. I have been a teacher for 14 years now.

5. It has always been my ambition to become a famous artist.

A. I want to become a famous artist as soon as possible.

B. Always in my life do I want to become a famous artist.

C. I have always dreamt of becoming a famous artist.

D. Dreaming of becoming a famous artist, I always have that ambition.

II. Rewrite the sentences, using the given words.

1. Tim is better at English than Susan. → Susan isn’t_________________________________________________ 2. We spent five hours getting to London. → It took _____________________________________________________ 3. Listening to music gives him pleasure. → He enjoys _______________________________________________ 4. She is more beautiful than her younger sister. → Her ____________________________________________________ 5. They began studying English in 2004. → They ___________________________________________________ 6. You ought to go to school now. → It’s time ________________________________________________ 7. My father works as a teacher at a high school. → My ____________________________________________________ 8. We can’t afford to buy the car. → The car is _______________________________________________ 9. People say that he beats his wife. → He is said to _____________________________________________ 10. She bought that house in 1990. → She has _________________________________________________ III. Make questions with “How much” or “How many” and the cues given.

1. water/ you/ drink/ every day? ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 84

2. students/ in you class? ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 3. hours/ you/ sleep/ every night? ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 4. money/ you/ have/ in your bag or pocket? ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ 5. subjects/ you/ study/ at school? ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________

IV. Use the words and phrases to complete the text.

EATING HABITS IN VIET NAM 1. Meals/ Viet Nam - lunch or dinner - must/ include rice. Traditionally, Vietnamese meals/ prepared by wives or mothers and the whole family/ is expected/ eat. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

2. However, families now may have only one meal a day at home, and it may not include all the family members. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

3. Tastes, cooking methods, and dishes/ be different among the 3 regions: the North, the Central,/ the South. Nowadays, these differences/ become small. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

4. When family/ not have time to prepare meals, they/ eat out. Employees/ have lunch somewhere/ by the work places. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

5. Since Viet Nam/ opened/ doors to foreign investors, more foreigners/ have stayed/ worked in Viet Nam. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

6. As/ result, more foreign restaurants/ been opened in Viet Nam, especially/ big cities.

85

...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

7. Young people/ Viet Nam now like fast food because/ its conveniences. Vietnamese fast food shops/ been opened, and the most successful/ food chain/ is Pho 24. ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................

8. In recent years, there/ been more Vietnamese fast food chains such/ Bun Bo Hue 3A3. ...................................................................................................................... ===================================================

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A 11. C 21. C 31. C 41. C 2. C 12. B 22. A 32. A 42. A 3. B 13. D 23. A 33. B 43. B 4. A 14. A 24. B 34. C 44. A 5. A 15. A 25. B 35. A 45. C 6. A 16. C 26. D 36. A 46. A 7. C 17. D 27. A 37. D 47. C 8. A 18. A 28. C 38. D 48. D 9. D 19. C 29. B 39. C 49. C 10. B 20. A 30. D 40. A 50. C II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. C 4. A 7. D 10. B 13. C 2. B 5. A 8. C 11. A 14. C 3. D 6. B 9. A 12. A 15. A B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.B 11.D 21.B 31.B 41.D 2.D 12.A 22.D 32.D 42.D 3.C 13.B 23.D 33.D 43.B 86

4.A 5.D 6.B 7.D 8.B 9.B 10.D

14.B 15.B 16.A 17.A 18.B 19.B 20.C

24.C 25.A 26.B 27.D 28.D 29.A 30.D

34.C 35.D 36.C 37.B 38.A 39.B 40.D

44.C 45.C 46.A 47.C 48.D 49.A 50.C

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. left

6. salty

11.boneless

16. boneless

2. tasty

7.mixture

12.preparation

17. carefully

3. fragrantly

8.fried

13.fragrant

18. educated

4.variety

9.juicy

14. composer

19. paintings

5. stewing

10. commonly

15. construction

20. popularity

D. VERB FORMS I. Supply the correct verb forms 1. am not/ don’t want

5. is cooking/ cooking

2. is having

6. to have

3.Are/ is

7. Have ... written/wrote

4. Does... like

8. will fly

II. Use the past simple tense to complete the sentences.

1. visited

6. has taught

2. bought

7. saw

3. gave

8. were

4. arrived

9. put

5. spoke

10. lived

III. Supply the correct verb form.

1. did … learn

6. did … save

2. am having

7. bought

87

3. Is

8. didn’t drink

4. have ever eaten.

9. does… need

5. is

10. I have never enjoyed

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. D 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. A 8. D 9. C 10. A 6. B 7. A II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. many → much 6.in → for 2.some → any 7.to→ than 3.a → some 8.glass→ glasses 4.ingredient → ingredients 9. so→ as 5.breads → bread 10. Saw→ was seen F. READING I. Read the texts and complete the chart.

Meals 1. Breakfast

When 6 a.m

2. Lunch

12 o’clock

3. Dinner (Light meal)

5 p.m

What bacon, sausages, eggs, tomatoes, mushrooms, toast, two or three cups of tea. meat, potatoes, vegetables, pudding such as apple pie, custard, a cup of tea. eggs, or cheese on toast, cakes or biscuits andanother cup of tea.

II. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the following passage 1. dish 2. introduction 3. when 4. easy 5. special 6. for 7. dried 8. kinds 9. mixed 10. are III. Read the passage and decide which answer A, B, C or D best fits each space. l. B

2. D

3. C

4. D

5. D

6. A

7. B

8. C

9. C

10. A

IV. Read the passage carefully, and then do the following tasks.

A/ 1. calories 3. snacks 5. salty 7. vitamins 2. energy 4. sweet 6. healthy 8. sources B/ 1. It helps you feel great.

2. You can still enjoy your favourite sweet and salty foods.

3. Because they contain calcium and keep your teeth and bones healthy.

88

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

They keep our bodies healthy and they give us energy to work and play.

Because they help you have a healthy heart.

We get whole grains from bread, cereal, pasta, and rice.

Because they are low in calories and full of vitamins.

Fruit and vegetables with darker colours have more vitamins.

G. WRITING I. Choose the sentence that has the same meaning as the first. l. A

2. D

3. B

4. D

5.C

II. Rewrite the sentences, using the given words.

1. Susan isn’t as good at English as Tim. 2. It took us five hours to get to London.

3. He enjoys listening to music.

4. Her younger sister isn’t as beautiful as she is.

5. They have studied English since 2004.

6. It’s time for you to go to school.

7. My father is a teacher at a high school.

8. The car is too expensive for us to buy.

9. He is said to beat his wife.

10. She has bought that house since 1990.

III. Make questions with “How much” or “How many” and the cues given.

1. How much water do you drink every day?

2. How many students are there in you class?

3. How many hours do you sleep every night?

4. How much money do you have in your bag or pocket?

5. How many subjects do you study at school?

IV. Use the words and phrases to complete the text.

1. Meals in Viet Nam - lunch or dinner - must include rice. Traditionally, Vietnamese meals are prepared by wives or mothers and the whole family is expected to eat.

2. However, families now may have only one meal a day at home, and it may not include all the family members.

3. Tastes, cooking methods, and dishes are different between the 3 regions: the North, the Central, and the South. Nowadays, these differences have become small.

4. When family do not have time to prepare meals, they eat out. Employees have lunch somewhere nearby the work places.

5. Since Viet Nam opened its doors to foreign investors, more foreigners have stayed and worked in Viet Nam. 89

6. As a result, more foreign restaurants have been opened in Viet Nam, especially in big cities.

7. Young people in Viet Nam now like fast food because of its conveniences. Vietnamese fast food shops have been opened, and the most successful fast food chain is Pho 24.

8. In recent years, there have been more Vietnamese fast food chains such as Bun Bo Hue 3A3. =================================================== ENGLISH 7 HáťŒC Kᝲ 1 UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. A. theater B. health C. bath D. father 2. A. storage B. advantage C. message D. garage 3. A. feature B. chapter C. literature D. culture 4. A. language B. passage C. danger D. angry 5. A. student B. graduate C. gradual D. soldier 6. A. chocolate B. marching C. chemistry D. speech 7. A. chair B. child C. cheese D. architect 8. A. stopped B. carried C. looked D. watched 9. A. gift B. region C. geography D. germ 10. A. children B. chili C. chaos D. chicken B. unusual C. uncle D. difficult 11. A. result 12. A. piano B. fish C. like D. badminton 13. A. rest B. help C. garden D. identify 14. A. game B. arrange C. skate D. cake 15. A. yogurt B. doll C. collect D. hobby 16. A. eggs B. cups C. cartons D. noodles 17. A. soup B. salt C. sauce D. sugar 18. A. fridge B. rice C. spinach D. milk 19. A. pagoda B. blanket C. academy D. tablet 20. A. children B. scholar C. teacher D. lunch 21. A. question B. nation C. education D. recognition 22. A. visited B. founded C. decided D. developed 23. A. heritage B. historic C. recognise D. literature 24. A. food B. cook C. soup D. noodle 25. A. spicy B. fry C. shy D. try 26. A. salt B. tablet C. ham D. pancake 27. A. musician B. sugar C. ocean D. television 28. A. scholar B. architect C. machine D. school 90

29. A. distance 30. A. truck 31. A. policeman 32. A. dangerous 33. A. knife 34. A. vacation 35. A. few 36. A. school 37. A. university 38. A. shiny 39. A. chef 40. A. station 41. A. education 42. A. heart 43. A. fear 44. A. enough 45. A. phoned 46. A. can 47. A. enough 48. A. machine 49. A. easy 50. A. prepare

B. family B. unload B. sign B. travel B. rocket B. America B. left B. architect B. thirsty B. shampoo B. chance B. information B. calendar B. earn B. near B. account B. called B. cell B. courage B. cheap B. seat B. engine

C. different C. turn C. bike C. man C. desk C. about C. of C. chemist C. bird C. machine C. chair C. equation C. imagine C. heard C. clear C. surround C. cooked C. call C. encounter C. teacher C. learn C. invention

D. library D. lunch D. spider D. traffic D. bookshelf D. actor D. flu D. kitchen D. girl D. research D. cheek D. destination D. soldier D. learn D. pear D. outdoor D. climbed D. cold D. nourish D. child D. eat D. electricity

II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A. construct B. temple C. compass D. tablet 2. A. imperial B. academy C. pavilion D. necessary B. emperor C. consider D. umbrella 3. A. historic 4. A. heritage B. educate C. engineer D. brilliant 5. A. ticket B. landmark C. statue D. consist 6. A. answer B. allow C. agree D. deny 7. A compare B. approve C. enter D. pollute 8. A. mother B. relax C. father D. garden 9. A. decide B. combine C. apply D. happen 10. A. promise B. picture C. listen D. accept 11. A. apple B. England C. shampoo D. grammar 12. A. open B. provide C. complete D. prefer 13. A. become B. promise C. suggest D. disorder 14. A. exciting B. telephone C. tomorrow D. November 15. A. policeman B. cinema C. yesterday D. politics 91

B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Khue Van Palivilion is as the symbol of HN city.

A. regarded

B. surrounded

2. Minh Mang Tomb

C. expected

constructing in 1841, and

D. considered three years later.

A. started - was completed

B. was started - was completed

C. started – completed

D. was started - complete

3. Many beautiful Cham Towers in NinhThuan Province

and now

many

domestic and foreign tourists.

A. were restored – attract

B. restored - were attracted

C. restored - attracted

D. was restored - attracted

4. Tom doesn’t know why many students pay a

to the Temple of Literature before

their exam.

A. visit

B. holiday

5. Oxford University

C. walk

the oldest university in the English speaking world.

A. considered to be

B. is regarded as

C. is considered being

D. is regarded

6. Many kinds of fruits and vegetables A. are selling

B. between

10. You’d better A. will take

C. next

C. find

92

D. near

D. found

in 1076 under Emperor Ly Nhan Tong.

B. constructing

C. build

D. construct

an umbrella because it’s rainy.

B. take

C. taking

11. Papers at the Royal examinations in the past were A. correct

D. are sold

in 1070.

B. was founded

9. The Imperial Academy was A. constructed

C. sell

to the main building.

8. The Temple of Literature A. was found

at the floating market in Can Tho.

B. will sell

7. The laboratory is A. in front

D. trip

B. check

C. passed

D. to take by the King.

D. graded

12. A lot of flowers A. growing

in Da Lat throughout the year.

B. are grown

13. The University of Oxford A. is ranking

C. grow

D. grew

among the top five universities in the world.

B. being ranked

C. ranks

D. is ranked

14. The Imperial Academy was regarded ______ the first university in Viet Nam. A. for

B. of

C. to

15. The students of the Imperial Academy

D. as from local examinations all over the

country.

A. were selected

B. selecting

C. selected

D. was selected

16. I think the University of Cambridge is the second A. oldest

B. elder

17.The Temple of Literature ___

the United Kingdom.

C. old by old trees and

D. older __ many interesting things.

A. is surrounded – contains

B. surrounds - is contained

C. surrounds – contains

D. is surrounded - is contained

18. In 2003, four

of Emperor Ly Thanh Tong, Emperor Ly Nhan Tong,

Emperor Le Thanh Tong and Chu Van An were built in the Temple of Literature.

A. statues 19. We

B. forms

B. were spoken

20. Tan Ky House in Hoi An B. was built

21. The Temple of Literature A. find

D. photos

to Professor Marshall about the research topic two days ago.

A. have spoken

A. is to built

C. stone tablets

B. found

C. spoke

D. were speaking

over two hundred years ago.

C. build

D. is built

in 1070.

C. was found

D. was founded

22. The Temple of Literature______ by thousands of people every year.

A. is visit

B. is visited

C. was visited

D. were visited

23. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong is the person who constructed_______ A. The Imperial Academy

B. Great Wall

C. One-pillar Pagoda

C. Ha Long Bay

24. Doctors’ stone tablets were made of______.

93

A. sand

B. brick

C. stone

D. cement.

25. The Temple of Literature is one of the historic and_____ sites in Vietnam.

A. cultural

B. culture

C. old

D. new

26. It’s a great idea to take some medicines______ you have a fever now.

A. so

B. because

C. but

D. and

27. There is a pond_______ the garden and the house.

A. in

B. among

28. Bach Ma National Park A. locates

C. between

D. on

close to the sea.

B. located

C. is located

D. is being located

29. You’d better_____ an umbrella because it is going to rain.

A. to take

B. taking

30. Oxford University

C. take

the oldest university in the English speaking world.

A. is considered being

B. is regarded

C. considered to be

D. is regarded as

31. Many kinds of fruits and vegetables A. sell

B. are sold

32. Many precious relics A. keep

B. is kept

C. are selling

C. kept

B. are recognised

34. The first Doctors’ stone tablets A. were erected

at the floating market in Can Tho. D. will sell

in the Temple of Literature.

33. In 2010, the 82 Doctors’ stone tablets A. recognised

D. took

as a Memory of the World.

C. recognising

D. were recognised

in 1484.

B. was erected

35.The Temple of Literature

D. are kept

C. are erected

by old trees and

D. erected many interesting things

A. surrounds - contains

B. is surrounded - is contained

C. is surrounded — contains

D. surrounds - is contained

36. Thien Quang Tinh (Well of Heavenly Clarity) is________ in the third courtyard in the Temple of Literature.

A. considered

B.visited

C. put

D. located

37. Hue Imperial City was________ as a world cultural heritage by UNESCO in 1993.

94

A. recognised

B.developed

C.rebuilt

D. supported

38. Khue Van Pavilion is________ as one of the traditional symbols in Ha Noi. A. erected

B.entered

C. regarded

D. prepared

39. Those talented students were________ for this university from the entrance exams.

A. founded

B. consisted

C. selected

D. booked

40. Many young men were ________for the dedication to the country in the Imperial Academy.

A. renamed

B.educated

C. ranked

D. grown

41. Many famous scholars in Viet Nam's history were graduated _______the Imperial Academy.

A. in

B. to

C. at

D. from

42. The old pagoda in this town was____ last month, but its architecture wasn't changed.

A. reconstructed

B.worked

C. surrounded

D. situated

43. Chu Van An had a remarkable________ in teaching.

A. erection

B.construction

C.career

D. preparation

44. I________ to sing first in the contest.

A. am chose

B.am chosen

C. were chosen

D. choose

45. Hoan Kiem Lake_______ in Ha Noi. It is one of the most famous lakes in Viet Nam. A. was situated

B. were situated

C. is situated

D. are situated

46. Their organisation________ to support the preservation of historical places in this town last year.

A. is founded

B.are founded

C. was founded

D. were founded

47. Her presents________ in her mother's trip in Ha Noi last week.

A. were bought

B. are bought

C. buy

D. was bought

48. Some precious relics under Emperor Ly Thanh Tong________ in the Temple of Literature.

A. are displaying

B. was displayed

C. is displayed

D. are displayed

49. Some old buildings________ in this town because the weather is so bad now.

95

A. weren't rebuilt

B. aren't rebuilt

C. were rebuilt

D. are rebuilt

50. Her pictures of this trip ________ to her yesterday because her friend's computer was broken.

A. wasn't sent

B. weren't sent

C.didn't send

D. aren't sent

C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. The Temple of Literature is one of the best________ places in

(CULTURE)

Viet Nam.

2. Students tried to pass the Royal exams to achieve their________

(DOCTOR)

when theystudied in the Temple of Literature.

3. Chu Van An was one of the most brilliant and famous_______ in (SCHOLAR) Viet Nam's history. _________________

4. He completed his exams________ and won a scholarship to

(SUCCEED)

study abroad.

5. The ___ 's pictures are very beautiful. They are shown in a (PAINT) national exhibition.

6. He is _____ about his sister's performance because she was sick (ANXIETY) yesterday.

7. She is cooking the food ____. It's interesting to see it.

(SPECIAL)

8. He took an ____

(EXAM)

last week. His result was very good.

9. He received _____asa good teacher after working hard for a long (RECOGNIZE) time.

10. Thong Nhat Palace is a

attraction in HCMC.

(TOUR)

11. The Temple of Literature is considered one of the most (IMPORT) _____historical sites of Viet Nam.

12. The school is quite normal, but its

are really beautiful.

(SURROUND)

13. The students were carefully

for the final exam.

(PREPARE)

14. Was the 96

of the first Doctors’ Stone Tablet ordered

(ERRECT)

by King Le Thanh Tong?

15. Many students and teachers have

for

the (CONTRIBUTE)

development of the school.

16. The

was a great success and it became famous all (UNIVERSE)

over the world.

17. Many

and scholars discussed the change of the (EDUCATE)

curricula.

18. The circle and square of the pavilion _______________ the (SYMBOL) heaven and the earth.

19. Tourists like to visit _______________ monuments such as Ho (HISTORY) Chi Minh Mausoleum and the Temple of Literature.

20. King Ly Nhan Tong was the _______________ of the Imperial

(FOUND)

Academy.

D. VERB FORMS I. Supply the correct passive form of the verbs in brackets.

1. This computer 2. America

(use) for two years. (discover) by Christopher Columbus.

3. I think this institution

(widen) twice since 1999.

4. Sydney Opera House in Australia

(finish) in 1973.

5. My sister is studying law at Viet Nam National University, Ho Chi Minh city now.

This university

(situate) in Thu Due District.

6. The Great Wall in China

(build) many centuries ago.

7. David and his father

(visit) the Temple of Literature last week.

8. The Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco 9. The University of Cambridge

(complete) in 1937. (form) in 1209. It is always considered to

be one of the most prestigious universities in the world.

10. BurjKhalifa in Dubai, the highest building in the world, II. Supply the correct verb forms.

97

(open)in 2010.

1. After class, one of the students always (erase) 2. People (spend)

the chalk board.

a lot of money on advertising everyday.

3. The phonograph (invent)

by Thomas Edison in 1877.

4. For the past years, my mother (do) 5. No one (believe)

all my washing by hand.

his story.

6. The women in most countries in the world (give) 7. People (think)

the right to vote.

that Jack London's life and writing's (represent)

____the

American love of adventure.

8. How many marks (give) 9. The detective (see)

to you by the teacher? the woman (put)

10. Drivers (advise)

the jewelry in her bag.

to use an alternative route by police.

III. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the following passage go

study

state

find

choose

take

start

stay

private

leave

Secondary education in the USA In the USA students (1) ___________ their secondary education at the age of 11. First they (2) ___________ to Middle School for three years. Then they go for High School for four years, from the age 14 to 18. Some students (3) ___________ school when they are 16 and (4) ___________ job. But most students (5) ___________ at High School still they are 18. Then they (6) ___________ exams and they get "High School Diploma". There aren't any national exams.

All students at secondary school in the USA (7) ___________ English, maths, science, and P.E., but students (8) ___________ other subjects, so they don't all study the same subjects.

About 90% of students in the USA go to (9) ___________ schools. About 10% go to (10) ___________ schools. Most of the private schools are religious schools.

E. CORRECTION

98

I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. She hopes she will have a greatly success in her study at university.

A B C D 2. They should book tickets of this train to Hue on advance.

C D A B 3. He decided visiting some places of interest in Can Tho at the weekend.

A B C D 4. This area is contained some souvenir shops, a small restaurant and a clean park.

A B C D 5. The historical and precious relics protect carefully in the museum.

A B C D 6. Many good students are educated in this school by the old teacher many years ago.

A B C D 7. She was given a present to her friends yesterday because she couldn't come to their party.

A B C D 8. At the age of seven, Picasso received artistic training by his father.

A B C D 9. My mother doesn’t enjoy country music, and I don’t like it too.

A B C D 10.Jason hasn’t telephoned me since two weeks.

A B C D II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

Sentences Correction 1. Khue Van Pavilion is regarded by the symbol of Ha Noi. ___________ 2. Today, the Temple was considered one of the most popular tourist ___________ attractions.

3. I haven’t ever been to Hanoi before. ___________ 4. The students were not interested in history because it was bored. ___________ 5. Tourists should add the Temple of Literature to their visit list in ___________ Hanoi.

6. You’d better to take your raincoat because it’s going to rain. ___________ 7. The Doctors’ stone tablets was first erected by King Le Thanh ___________ Tong.

8. The Imperial City of Hue was finally complete under the reign of ___________ King Minh Mang.

9. The puppets are maked of wood and then painted. ___________ 10.She would like to make an apple pie, but there isn’t any apples left! ___________ F. READING I. Read the following passage and choose the best option for each numbered bank.

99

for Chu Van An was born in 1292 and died in 1370. From his childhood, he was (1) his intelligence. He did not have the dream of (2) part in exams to become mandarins other students. Chu Van An stayed at (4) and taught himself by reading (3) books, and opened schools. His school quickly became famous in the region and many students from other places went there to (5) ._____ Chu Van An to be the principal of the Imperial Emperor Tran Minh Tong (6) Academy to teach his crown prince and other students to become (7)______people for the country. In 1359, Emperor Tran Minh Tong gave his crown (8)_____his son, Tran Hien Tong, who was also a student of Chu Van An. Under the regime of Emperor Tran Hien Tong, the court and the country were peaceful. (9) ____, this period lasted only for 12 years. Then Emperor Tran Hien Tong died, and Tran Du Tong inherited the crown. The social situation became complicated, the people were very poor and many good people were killed.

Chu Van An bravely submitted a petition which requested the Emperor to behead 7 perfidious mandarins, so it was (10) “Seven Beheaded Petition” (That Tram So).

“Seven Beheaded Petition” became the symbol of the courageous attitude of the real intellectuals, and of Chu Van An’s spirit.

1. A. like B. famous C. Such as D. Similar 2. A. approximately B. expressively C. taking D. progressively 3. A. like B. pioneering C. pioneering D. pioneers 4. A. custom B. waiter C. service D. home 5. A. tourists B. study C. pilot D. guess 6. A. invited B. orbition C. orbital D. orbiting 7. A. constructed B. designed C. talented D. painted 8. A. equipment B. to C. equivalent D. furniture 9. A. invitation B. ticket C. space D. However 10.A. called B. departures C. islands D. destinations II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word.

In the USA, students (1) their secondary education at the age of 11. First they (2) to Middle School for three years. Then they go for High School for four years, from the age 14 to 18. Some students (3) school when they are 16 and (4) jobs. But most students (5) at High School still they are 18. Then they (6) exams and they get “High School Diploma”. There aren’t any national exams.

All students at secondary school in the USA (7) English, maths, science, and P.E., but students (8) other subjects, so they don’t all study the same subjects.

About 90% of students in the USA go to (9) school. About 10% go to (10) schools. Most of the private schools are religious schools.

III. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D tor each question.

The Temple of Literature is about 10 minutes away from HoanKiem Lake. It was constructed in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty, first to honor Confucius and nowadays 100

to celebrate the doctorate and high rank scholar of Vietnam. In 1076, Emperor Ly Nhan Tong continued the work and built the Imperial Academy as the first university of Vietnam.

The Temple is divided into five courtyards. The first courtyard is from the main gate to Dai Trung Gate. The second is with Khue Van Pavilion. The pavilion symbol is used on the street signs of Ha Noi. The third courtyard is the place where the doctorate names were listed on the stone tablets above tortoise backs. The fourth courtyard is dedicated for Confucius and his 72 honored students, as well as Chu Van An - one of the most famous teachers at the Imperial Academy. The last is also the farthest courtyard is Thai Hoc House, which was used as the Imperial Academy. Thai Hoc House holds a small collection of old-time costumes for students and scholars.

1. Where is the Temple of Literature? _________________________________________________________ 2. When and by whom was it built? _________________________________________________________ 3. How many courtyards are there in the Temple of Literature? _________________________________________________________ 4. Which courtyard is with Khue Van Pavilion? _________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Pavilion symbol used on? _______________________________________________________ IV. Read the passage about the Temple of Literature, and then answer the questions.

The Temple of Literature is about 10 minutes away from Hoan Kiem Lake. It was constructed in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty, first to honor Confucius and nowadays to celebrate the doctorates and high rank scholars of Vietnam. In 1076, Emperor Ly Nhan Tong continued the work and built the Imperial Academy as the first university of Vietnam.

The temple is divided into five courtyards. The first courtyard is from the main gate to Dai Trung Gate. The second is with Khue Van Pavilion. Thepavilion symbol is used on all street signs of Ha Noi. The third courtyard is the place where doctorate names were listed on the stone tablets above tortoise backs. The fourth courtyard is dedicated for Confucius and his 72 honoured students, as well as Chu Van An - one of the most famous teachers at the Imperial Academy. The last is also the farthest courtyard is Thai Hoc House, which was used as the Imperial Academy. Thai Hoc House holds a small collection of old-time costumes for students and scholars.

1. Where is the Temple of Literature? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. When and by whom was it built? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 3. How many courtyards are there in the Temple of Literature?

101

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Which courtyard has Khue Van Pavilion? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Khue Van Pavilion symbol used for? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Where can we find stone tablets above tortoise backs with the names of doctors? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 7. What is the fourth courtyard dedicated for? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Where is the Thai Hoc House? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 9. What was used as the Imperial Academy? ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 10. What does the Thai Hoc House hold nowadays? __________________________________________________________________ G. WRITING I. Complete the second sentence in each pair so that it has similar meaning to the first sentence.

1. People invented the wheel thousands of years ago. → The wheel ................................................................................................

2. My father waters these flower every morning. → These flowers ..........................................................................................

3. People use computers all over the world. → Computers ...............................................................................................

4. Are they building a statue of Chu Van An? → Is ............................................................................................................. ?

5. John invited Fiona to his birthday party last night. → Fiona .......................................................................................................

6. They keep many ancient things in museums. → Many ancient things ................................................................................

102

7. Do four busy streets surround the Temple of Literature? → Is ............................................................................................................. ?

8. People make many famous films in Hollywood. → Many famous films .................................................................................

9. Her mother is preparing the dinner in the kitchen. → The dinner ...............................................................................................

10.I do all my homework on my computer. → All my homework ...................................................................................

II. Turn these sentences into passive voice.

1. The bill includes service. → ..................................................................................................................

2. Nana chooses the book carefully. → ..................................................................................................................

3. We don’t use that room. → ..................................................................................................................

4. They grow fruits in California. → ..................................................................................................................

5. These jeans attract many young people. → ..................................................................................................................

6. People don’t use this road very often. → ..................................................................................................................

7. I wash the dishes in the evening. → ..................................................................................................................

III. Write the sentences about the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy, using the cues given.

1. Temple of Literature/ built/ 1070/ at the time/ Emperor Ly Nhan Tong. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 2. In 1076/ Imperial Academy/ Vietnam’s first national university/ built/ within/ Temple of Literature. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 3. It/ a learning centre/ teach/ Vietnam’s mandarin class. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 4. The university/ function/ more than 700 years/ 1076 - 1779. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 103

5. During that period/ 2,313 doctors/ graduated/ Imperial Academy. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 6. There/ 82 stone tablets/ names and origins/ 1307 doctors/ corresponding to/ 82 royal examinations/ 1442 - 1779. ____________________________________________________________________ 7. Emperor Tran Minh Tong/ invite/ Chu Van An/ the principal/ the Imperial Academy. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 8. If/ you/ visit/ temple/ beginning of the year/ or/ May/ you/ see/ many students/ come/ rub/ the tortoise heads. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 9. They/ believe/ it/ bring/ them good luck. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 10. 2010/ the 82 Doctors’ stone tablets/ recognise/ UNESCO/ a Memory/ World.

• • • •

IV. Write a report about how to make a trip to the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy, using the cues given.

Location: 10 minutes away from Hoan Kiem Lake by bus Address: 58 QuocTu Giam Street, Dong Da District, Hanoi.

What to see: five courtyards after going through the main gate Khue Van Pavilion in the second courtyard the Doctors’ stone tablets in the third courtyard Thai Hoc House in the last courtyard, used as the Imperial Academy.

Opening hours: 8.30am - 11.30am and 1.30pm - 4.30pm every day except Monday and national holidays Tickets:10,000VND/ ticket 1. The Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy is about ____________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 2. It is located at _________________________________________________________ 3. When you enter the main gate, you can see __________________________________ 104

______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 4. The Temple of Literature opens at _________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 5. The ticket costs ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ===================================================

ANSWER KEYS UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM A. PHONETICS I. Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others in each group 1. D 11. D 21. A 31. A 41. B 2. D 12. C 22. D 32. A 42. A 3. B 13. C 23. C 33. A 43. D 4. C 14. B 24. B 34. D 44. A 5. A 15. C 25. D 35. C 45. C 6. C 16. B 26. B 36. D 46. B 105

7. D 17. D 27. D 37. A 47. C 8. B 18. B 28. C 38. D 48. A 9. A 19. A 29. D 39. A 49. C 10. C 20. B 30. C 40. C 50. A II. Choose the word whose main stressed syllable is placed differently from that of the other in each group.

1. A 4. C 7. C 10. D 13. B 2. D 5. D 8. B 11. C 14. B 3. B 6. A 9. D 12. A 15. A B. MULTIPLE CHOICE I. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.

1.A 11.C 21.D 31.B 41.D 2.A 12.B 22.B 32.D 42.A 3.A 13.D 23.A 33.D 43.C 4.A 14.D 24.C 34.A 44.B 5.B 15.A 25.A 35.C 45.C 6.D 16.A 26.B 36.D 46.C 7.C 17.A 27.C 37.A 47.A 8.B 18.A 28.C 38.C 48.D 9.A 19.C 29.C 39.C 49.B 10.B 20.B 30.D 40.B 50.B C. WORD FORMS I. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentence.

1. cultural

6. anxious

11. important

16. university

2. doctorates

7.specially

12. surroundings

17. educators

3. scholars

8.examination

13. prepared

18.symbolise

4.successfully

9.recognition

14. erection

19. Historic

5. painter

10. tourist

15. contributed

20.founder

D. VERB FORMS I. Supply the correct passive form of the verbs in brackets.

1. has been used

6. was built

2. was discovered

7. visited

3. has been widened

8. was completed

4. was finished

9. was formed

5. is situated

10. was opened

106

II. Supply the correct verb forms.

1. erases

6. have been given

2. spend

7. think-represent

3. was invented

8. are given

4. has done

9. saw

5. believes

10. are advised

III. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the following passage 1. start

2. go

3. leave

4. find

5. stay

6. take

7. study

8. choose

9. state

10. private

E. CORRECTION I. Choose the underlined word or phrase (marked A, B, C or D) in each sentence that needs correcting.

1. C 2. D 3. A 4. A 5. C 8. D 9. D 10. C 6. B 7. A II. There is one mistake in each sentence. Underline and correct the mistake.

1. by→ as 6.to take → take 2.was → is 7.was→ were 3.haven’t ever been → haven’t been/ have 8.complete → completed never been 4.bored → boring 9.maked→ made 5.visit → visiting 10.isn’t → aren’t F. READING I. Read the following passage and choose the best option for each numbered bank.

1. B

2. C

3. A

4.D

5. B

6. A

7.C

8. B

9.D

10. A

II. Fill in the blank with a suitable word.

1. start

2. go

3. leave

4. find

5. stay

6. take

7. study

8. choose

9. state

10. private

III. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D tor each question.

1. It is about 10 minutes away from Hoan Kiem Lake.

2. It was constructed in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty.

3. There are five courtyards.

107

4. The second is with Khue Van Pavilion.

5. It is used on all street signs of Ha Noi. IV. Read the passage about the Temple of Literature, and then answer the questions.

1. The Temple of Literature is about 10 minutes away from Hoan Kiem Lake.

2. It was constructed in 1070 under Ly Thanh Tong’s dynasty.

3. There are five courtyards.

4. The second is with Khue Van Pavilion.

5. It is used on all street signs of Ha Noi. 6. We can find the stone tablets above tortoise backs with the names of doctors in the third courtyard.

7. The fourth courtyard is dedicated for Confucius and his 72 honoured students, as well as Chu Van An. 8. Thai Hoc House is in the farthest courtyard.

9. Thai Hoc House was used as the Imperial Academy.

10. It holds a small collection of old-time costumes for students and scholar G. WRITING I. Complete the second sentence in each pair so that it has similar meaning to the first sentence.

1. The wheel was invented thousands of years ago.

2. These flowers are watered by my father every morning.

3. Computers are used all over the world.

4. Is a statue of Chu Van An being built?

5. Fiona was invited to his birthday party by John last night.

6. Many ancient things are kept in museums.

7. Is the Temple of Literature surrounded by four busy streets?

8. Many famous films are made in Hollywood.

9. The dinner is being prepared in the kitchen by her mother.

10. All my homework is done on my computer.

II. Turn these sentences into passive voice.

1. Service is included in the bill.

2. The book is chosen carefully by Nana.

3. That room isn’t used.

4. Fruits are grown in California.

5. Many young people are attracted by these jeans.

6. This road isn’t used very often.

108

7. The dishes are washed in the evening.

III. Write the sentences about the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy, using the cues given.

1. The Temple of Literature was built in 1070 at the time of Emperor Ly Nhan Tong.

2. In 1076, the Imperial Academy – Vietnam’s first national university – was built within the Temple of Literature.

3. It was a learning centre to teach Vietnam’s mandarin class.

4. The university functioned for more than 700 years from 1076 to 1779.

5. During that period, 2,313 doctors were graduated from the Imperial Academy.

6. There are 82 stone tablets with the names and origins of 1307 doctors corresponding to 82 royal examinations from 1442 to 1779.

7. Emperor Tran Minh Tong invited Chu Van An to become the principal of the Imperial Academy.

8. If you visit the temple at the beginning of the year or in May, you will see many students come and rub the tortoise heads.

9. They believe it will bring them good luck.

10. In 2010, the 82 Doctors’ stone tablets were recognized by UNESCO as a Memory of the World.

IV. Write a report about how to make a trip to the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy, using the cues given.

1. The Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy is about 10 minutes away from Hoan Kiem Lake by bus.

2. It is located at 58 Quoc Tu Giam Street, Dong Da District, Hanoi.

3. When you enter the main gate, you can see five courtyards after going through the main gate: Khue Van Pavilion in the second courtyard, the Doctors’ stone tablets in the third courtyard, and Thai Hoc House in the last courtyard, used as the Imperial Academy.

4. The Temple of Literature opens at 8.30am – 11.30am and 1.30pm – 4.30pm every day except Monday and national holidays.

5. The ticket costs 10,000 VND. ===================================================

109